JP2019180689A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing the attention degree of to a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine is provided with a game board in which a game area is formed. When a winning occurs at an operating port provided in the game area, an MPU 402 of a main control device 162 executes a transition lottery to an opening/closing execution mode, and the variation display time of a symbol in an operating port display section of a main display unit 87 is determined. Information such as the result of the transition lottery and the variation display time is input from the main control device 162 to a notification/performance control device 140. The MPU of the notification/performance control device 140 determines a performance mode in a symbol display device 253 on the basis of the information. As the performance mode in the symbol display device 253, a normal performance mode and a special performance mode are provided. In the special performance mode, the last special performance of the game round is executed so as to be over the variation display and the confirmation display of the operating port display section.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device that displays a variable pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, triggered by a winning at an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a winning state is generated, and Fluctuation display is started. When the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-074175

  In recent years, various ideas have been made to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to realize an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to a game.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The present invention
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player;
The game-turning operation is performed with one game round being the end of the game-turning action due to the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means from the start of the game-round action. In a gaming machine provided with a game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means,
The game time control means includes period determining means for determining an operation period of the game turn operation and a maintenance period in which the notification result is maintained for each game time,
When the game turning operation is performed, it includes an effect execution means for performing an effect in parallel with the game turning operation,
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect is provided such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the effect executing means continuously executes the predetermined effect during one game. Having continuous execution means,
The continuous execution means is configured to execute a predetermined effect executed at the end of a game time so as to straddle the operation period and the maintenance period in the game time.

  According to the present invention, the degree of attention to a game can be preferably improved.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board unit from back. It is a rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a back pack unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is the schematic which shows a success / failure table. (A), (b) It is the schematic which shows the allocation table, (c) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the classification and support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. (A) Flow chart showing setting process of variable display time, (b) Schematic diagram showing variable display time table for non-reach generation referred to in low frequency support mode, (c) Reference in high frequency support mode It is the schematic which shows the fluctuation | variation display time table for non-reach generation. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display control process by MPU of an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special production modes. (A) Schematic which shows the kind of fluctuation | variation display aspect, (b) It is the schematic which shows the outline | summary of each fluctuation | variation display aspect. It is the schematic for demonstrating the flow of a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation display. (A) Schematic diagram showing the flow of game effects corresponding to pseudo continuous variation display, (b) Schematic diagram showing the relationship between effect color and jackpot expectation. (A) Schematic which shows the display content in time-shortage production mode, (b) It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game production. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the game production in time reduction production mode. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the reservation notice performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the pending | holding command performed in MPU of a main controller. (A) Schematic showing the flow of the notice effect, (b) Schematic showing the relationship between the variable display time and the variable display mode in each effect mode. (A) Flowchart showing special effect mode effect setting process executed by MPU of notification / effect control device, (b) Flow chart showing reach special effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows reach production pattern setting processing. (A) The schematic which illustrated the 1st special pattern table, (b) The schematic which illustrated the 2nd special pattern table. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game production by the 1st special production pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game production by the 2nd special production pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect setting process for complete removal. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st setting process. (A) The schematic which illustrated the 5th special pattern table, (b) The schematic which illustrated the 6th special pattern table. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game production by the 5th special pattern and the 6th special pattern. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd setting process. (A) The schematic which illustrated the 9th special pattern table, (b) The schematic which illustrated the 10th special pattern table. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game production by the 9th special pattern and the 10th special pattern. It is the schematic which shows contrast. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the start timing of reach display and the number of parts in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for cooperation performed in MPU of a alerting | reporting / production control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the game times before and behind. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the fixed display time of a pattern, and the stop display time of a pattern. (A) The flowchart which shows the stand-by display control process performed by MPU of a alerting | reporting / production control apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (b) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a change display mode and the propriety of stand-by display. It is the schematic which shows the flow of a game round effect. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the fixed display time of a pattern, and the stop display time of a pattern.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is formed by connecting a long frame material to four sides, and is formed so as to form a rectangular frame shape as a whole. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility or the like of the game hall.

  The gaming machine main part 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. Specifically, the upper support bracket 17 is fixed to a connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further, a lower portion is connected to the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. Side support fittings 18 are provided. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism. The support mechanism causes the gaming machine main unit 12 to turn the left side of the pachinko machine 10 in the front view with respect to the outer frame 11. The right side can be turned to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with the turning tip side (see FIGS. 3 and 4).

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main part 12 is disposed at the inner frame 13 as a base body, the front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and the rear of the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is provided. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in a front view of the gaming machine.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view of the gaming machine. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view of the gaming machine. Yes.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. Yes. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire gaming area described later can be viewed from the front. The door frame 14 is closed from the back side.

  The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of glass panels 23 having transparency and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion for partitioning the holding region of the glass panel 23 in the front-rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front-rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the glass panels 23, the gaming area PE is covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

  Note that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more.

  Around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21), light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. For example, an annular illumination part 26 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window part 21. In the annular illumination part 26, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or at a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp portion 27 is provided at the center of the annular illumination portion 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10 to light up when a failure such as an error occurs. A prize ball lamp unit 28 that is lit is provided. In addition, speaker units 29 for outputting sound effects, BGM, and the like corresponding to the gaming state are provided at positions close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 (see FIG. 3). In the speaker unit 29, monotonous gaming is suppressed by switching BGM or the like according to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper pan 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower pan 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 (see FIG. 2). The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to a game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper tray 33 and games that have not reached the game area PE (see FIG. 3) among the game balls launched by the game ball launching mechanism. When the ball is returned to the player, it has a function as a tray for storing the discharged game ball.

  A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch mechanism described later. The game ball firing speed increases as the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41 increases, and the game ball is played when the operation amount is adjusted to a predetermined amount by the player. The region PE is reached. Further, by adjusting the operation amount by the player, it becomes possible to divide game balls into a right route and a left route, which will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of a synthetic resin and includes a front door side upper tray passage that leads to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage that leads to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving port portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed at the upper corner of the passage forming unit 45, and the entrance portion of the front door side upper plate passage is formed by dividing the receiving port portion into left and right by a partition wall. The portion and the entrance portion of the front door side lower dish passage are partitioned. The upstream side of the front door side upper dish path and the front door side lower dish path are connected to a game ball distributing section described later, and the game balls that have entered the front door side upper dish path are guided to the upper plate 33 and are moved to the lower side of the front door. The game ball that has entered the dish passage is guided to the lower dish 34.

  Projecting shafts are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side of the back surface of the front door frame 14. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

  Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. In FIG. 5, as in FIG. 3, the configuration in the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly configured by an inner frame base body 50 whose outer shape is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The inner frame base body 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close the gap. The curtain plate is disposed below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, the lower end portion thereof). When the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the curtain plate. It will be posted. A slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference.

  Support metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although illustration is omitted, the support fittings 71 and 72 have shaft portions, and a bearing portion provided on the front door frame 14 is inserted into these shaft portions, so that the front door frame with respect to the inner frame 13 is inserted. 14 is rotatably supported.

  A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is disposed on the rotating front end side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end portion (vertical frame member to be described later) of the inner frame base body 50, and the front door collar member 76 is disposed in a scattered manner in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). have. In the inner frame base body 50, a slit for projecting to the front side of the inner frame 13 corresponding to each of the front door flange members 76 corresponds to the flange receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14. It is formed in this way. The front door eaves member 76 protruding through the slits is engaged with the eaves receiving member 49 provided on the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with the front door eaves member 76, whereby the front door The frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. The locking device 75 has an inner frame collar member 77 (see FIG. 4) that extends to the rear side of the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 77 are hooked on the hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main part 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

  The inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75) is provided with a cylinder lock 78 for performing an unlocking operation of the locking device 75. The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking units (each of the hook members 76 and 77, the interlocking hooks and the like) constituting the main part of the locking device 75, and is disposed adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the lock of the front door frame 14 on the inner frame 13 is released, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise). The inner frame 13 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 11.

  A housing recess 51 for housing the game board unit 80 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base body 50. The housing recess is recessed to the rear of the gaming machine according to the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is fixed to the housing recess 51 by a manual lock mechanism in a state of being fitted from the front of the gaming machine. A substantially rectangular window hole 52 is formed at the bottom of the housing recess 51, and the rear configuration of the game board unit 80 (a rear block 80 b described later) protrudes behind the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. . The window hole 52 is almost entirely covered from the front of the gaming machine by the game board unit 80 mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is provided with a game area PE in which a game ball flows down on the front surface and is provided on the back side of the game area formation body 80a and various game components (for example, a variable display unit, a control, etc.) to be described later. A back block 80b in which a device, a movable production mechanism, a decorative member capable of emitting light, and the like are mounted on the base body 251 are integrated. The game area forming body 80a is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the front portion of the back block 80b is visible through the game area forming body 80a.

  As already described, the game area PE is covered with the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is arranged so that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game area forming body 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game balls flowing down the game area PE are in the same game area PE. It is arrange | positioned so that it may not line up back and forth in the same location. Thereby, the ball blockage in the game area PE is suppressed.

  Hereinafter, the game board unit 80 (particularly, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 80a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as viewed from the rear.

  The game area forming body 80a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-rear direction). As shown in FIG. 6, a general winning port 81, a variable winning device 82, operating ports 83a and 83b, a through gate 84, and the like are disposed in each opening. When game balls enter the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operation ports 83a and 83b, the game balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to the respective winning portions, and the detection results thereof. Based on the above, a predetermined number of award balls (payout of game balls) and the like are given to the player. In addition, an out port 89 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area forming body 80a, and game balls that have not entered various ball-entry portions are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 89. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 89, the game ball entering the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operation ports 83a and 83b is also referred to as "winning". Express.

  In addition, a large number of nail members 93 are planted in the game area forming body 80a in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various members (servants) such as the windmill 94 are disposed. Has been. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations such as the nail member 93 and the windmill 94, and is adjusted so that the winning to the above-described general winning opening 81 or the like is generated with an appropriate probability.

  A central opening 85 is formed at the center of the game area forming body 80a, and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached so as to cover the central opening 85 from the back side of the game area forming body 80a. The variable display unit 252 and the like belonging to the back block 80b is located behind the central opening 85, and the variable display unit 252 and the like can be visually recognized through the central opening 85 (opening cover 86) from the front of the gaming machine. Yes. In FIG. 6, for convenience of explanation, the opening cover 86 is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and the variable display unit 252 is visible.

  Operating ports 83a and 83b, a through gate 84, and the like are disposed around the central opening 85. The operation ports 83a and 83b are configured by an upper operation port 83a disposed below the variable display unit 252, and a lower operation port 83b disposed directly below the upper operation port 83a. The (lottery opportunity entrance ball portion) 83b is provided with an electric accessory 91 as an open / close type entrance assist device (entrance assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). The electric accessory 91 includes a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece. When the position of the movable piece is changed by the drive unit, the ball entering the lower working port 83b is moved. It is possible to switch between a possible open state (auxiliary state) and a closed state (non-auxiliary state) in which the ball cannot enter. In addition, about the closed state of the electrically-driven accessory 91, it is sufficient if it is difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state, and it is not always necessary to disable the ball entry.

  In the game area PE, the through gate 84 is arranged at a position upstream of the lower operating port 83b (specifically, the side of the variable display unit 252), and the passage of the game ball through the through gate 84 is a trigger. When the lottery is won, the electric accessory 91 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

  When a ball enters the upper operation port 83a, three game balls are paid out. When a ball enters the lower operation port 83b, four game balls are paid out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, for example, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 83b with respect to the upper working port 83a, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower working port 83b larger than the number of payouts related to the upper working port 83a.

  The variable winning device (special winning device or special winning means) 82 has a large winning opening leading to the back side of the game area forming body 80a, and an opening / closing member (opening / closing) An opening / closing door is provided as a means. The open / close door can be switched between an open state (assist state) in which a game ball can enter and a closed state (non-assist state) in which the game ball cannot enter. The open / close door is connected to a variable winning drive unit (specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the game area forming body 80a, and the open / close door is normally kept closed, The player can be switched to the open state when winning the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won (when the result is a special game state advantageous to the player over the normal game state). It has become. It should be noted that it is sufficient for the closed state of the open / close door to be difficult to enter as compared to the open state, and it is not always necessary to make the entry impossible.

  The opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a big win is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 82 in the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is defined as one round, and a plurality of rounds (for example, 4, 8, 16 rounds) It is set so that the opening / closing of the door with the upper limit being repeated is repeated.

  Here, the variable display unit 252 will be supplementarily described. The variable display unit 252 has a symbol display device 253 that variably displays symbols (variable display) using a winning at the operation ports 83a and 83b as a trigger. The symbol display device 253 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. When the jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of symbols (symbol combinations) is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). . Note that the symbol display device 253 is not necessarily a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or 7-segment display device.

  A center frame 95 is provided in the game area forming body 80 a so as to surround the central opening 85. The center frame 95 is fixed from the front surface side to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, a plate body), and in such a fixed state, the center frame 95 stands up from the front surface of the game area forming body 80a. The gap dimension between the center frame 95 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the game area PE from colliding with the symbol display device 253, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE moves the variable display unit 252 (specifically, the center frame 95) to the right. The route is divided roughly into the route that detours from and the route that detours from the left side.

  On the upper surface of the frame portion constituting the lower portion of the center frame 95, a stage portion is formed on which the game ball can roll left and right. The game balls that have flowed in from the inflow ports formed in the left and right frame portions of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage portion through a warp passage formed in the center frame 95. The stage portion is configured so that the game ball that has reached the stage portion is relatively easy to flow into the upper operation port 83a, and the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage portion is improved. Contributing to In the present embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered by the transparent opening cover 86, and the game ball that has reached the stage portion is restricted from moving toward the back block 80b (variable display unit 252). Has been.

  The operation ports 83a and 83b are arranged at positions close to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 252). Since it is possible to shift to the special game state by using a winning at the operation ports 83a and 83b as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not the operation ports 83a and 83b are won, and grasps whether or not to shift to the special game state. Therefore, it is considered that the symbol display device 253 is noticed. Providing the operation ports 83a and 83b closer to the variable display unit 252 is a device for concentrating a portion that the player wants to focus on around the variable display unit 252.

  A game area partition member 99 that partitions the game area PE together with the guide rail 100 described later is disposed at the right end of the game area forming body 80a (the rotation tip of the game board unit 80 described later). The game area partition member 99 is provided with a stopper member with which a game ball flying along the main display unit 87 and the guide rail 100 collides. The stopper member is a buffer member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member flows down the game area PE after the momentum is weakened. That is, the stopper member is provided with a depressing function that weakens the momentum of the game ball that has collided.

  Here, the main display unit 87 will be described supplementarily. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the game area partition member 99, and a part of the main display unit 87 is arranged to face the glass unit 22. A main display portion D on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided in the facing portion. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to a main controller described later, and the display content of the main display unit D is controlled by the main controller.

  The main display unit D displays the lottery result based on the winning to the upper working port 83a, and the lower operation to display the lottery result performed based on the winning to the lower working port 83b. And a mouth display portion LD. In the upper working port display unit UD, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the upper working port 83a as a trigger, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 83a as a result of stopping the variation display The result of is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 83a is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the upper working port display unit, and the predetermined result is the stop result. After the pattern is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the lower working port display section LD, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the lower working port 83b as a trigger, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working port 83b as a result of stopping the variation display The result of is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 83b is a winning result corresponding to the jackpot, the variable display is stopped on the lower working port display section LD, and a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result. After that, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode according to the result.

  Here, based on the winning in any one of the operation ports 83a and 83b, the variable display is started in the corresponding operation port display units UD and LD, and the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed. Until a predetermined stop display time (determined display time) elapses while the pattern is stopped and displayed (until the final display is completed), it corresponds to one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning to any of the operation ports 83a and 83b occurs, the single game area In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and after the variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed, until the fixed display is completed. It is also possible to make the game one time. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to start the display of the variation of the pattern in the display portions UD and UL for each of the operation ports when the internal lottery based on the winning of the operation ports 83a and 83b is executed, and to the operation ports 83a and 83b. It is also possible to have a configuration that starts before an internal lottery based on a prize is executed.

  Further, the main display unit D of the main display unit 87 is provided with a through-gate display unit for displaying a lottery result based on winning through the through-gate 84 in addition to the two display units. In the through gate display unit, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the through gate 84 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 84 is clearly shown as the result of stopping the variation display. Is done. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 84 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit, and the change display is displayed. After being stopped, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 91 provided in the lower operation port 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is retained up to 4 times, but the number of suspension is displayed on the main display portion D of the main display unit 87. A display unit for the number of hold to be provided is provided.

  About the main display part D explained in full detail above, while being visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, it is avoided that a game ball moves in front of the main display part D. The visibility is guaranteed.

  Referring to FIG. 5 again, the configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described. Below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, a game ball is launched into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41. A game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided.

(Game Ball Launching Mechanism 110)
The game ball launching mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying a ball and a base plate 114 on which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50, thereby The inner frame base body 50 is integrated.

  The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game area forming body 80a. The firing rail 112 is formed with a groove portion having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and the front and rear positions of the game ball are defined by fitting the game ball into the groove portion.

  A ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-described firing standby position is disposed at a position closer to the downstream end portion (that is, the lower end portion) of the firing rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

  The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source / launch control device described later. Based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply / launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction, so that the game ball placed at the firing standby position is on the game area forming body 80a side, Is driven out toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game area forming body 80a.

  The guide rail 100 is formed by partitioning the game area PE together with the game area partition member 99 fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, the front surface of the plate) so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. Yes. In addition, the guide rail 100 includes an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged so as to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is formed by both the rails 101 and 102. Has been. The guide passage 103 includes an inlet portion 104 that is opened to the tip side (obliquely downward) of the firing rail 112, and an outlet portion 105 that is located above the gaming area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → the guide rail 100 (the entrance portion 104 → the exit portion 105). In the game area forming body 80a, on the front side of the exit portion 105, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, a reversal prevention member 106 that prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103. Is attached to prevent the subsequent launch of the game ball by the game ball that has reached the game area PE first.

  Each of the rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 has an arc shape centered at a substantially central portion of the game area PE. For this reason, the game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, that is, in contact with the outer rail 102 due to the centrifugal force generated by itself. That is, when a game ball is launched so as to be delivered to the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guide passage 103 substantially constitutes a pass area (passage path) through which the game ball passes. However, the area along the inner rail 101 is an area through which the game ball does not pass.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112, the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 are opposed to each other with the lower end edge of the game area forming body 80a interposed therebetween. Is arranged. That is, both the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 are shifted left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game area forming body 80a. Thus, a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112 while bringing both rails 100 and 112 close to the lower end edge of the game area forming body 80a.

  A foul ball passage is disposed below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball path is formed integrally with the path forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return to the inside of the guide passage 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage through the gap. Become. The foul ball path leads to the front door side lower dish path, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball path are discharged to the lower dish 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

  A rail cover 107 is provided at the left end of the game area forming body 80a so as to cover the outer rail 102 from the side. The game board unit 80 is often handled as a single unit during manufacturing or maintenance work, and at this time, the outer rail 102 may collide with a game table or the like. The rail cover 107 is a member mounted in view of such circumstances, and is provided with a protective function for preventing the outer rail 102 from being deformed due to the above factors or the like.

  A through-hole penetrating the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 in the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14). A passage forming member 121 is disposed on the side. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50 and has a main body side upper dish path 122 and a main body side lower dish path 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper dish passage 122 and the main body side lower dish passage 123 communicates with a game ball distributing section described later. In addition, a receiving portion of a passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 enters below the passage forming member 121, and a front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side upper plate passage 122, A front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage 123.

  An opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper dish path 122 and the main body side lower dish path 123 is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 50. The opening / closing member 124 is urged to a front position that closes the main body side upper dish passage 122 and the main body side lower dish passage 123. When the front door frame 14 is opened, each opening / closing member 124 is urged by this urging force. By being in the closed state, falling off of the game balls from the passages 122 and 123 is avoided. On the other hand, in a state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper dish path 122 and the front door side upper dish path communicate with each other, and the main body side lower dish path 123 and the front door side lower dish path communicate with each other.

  Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base body 50 and the game board unit 80) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

  As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing fitting 132 is attached to the rotation base end side (the right side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. A bearing portion 133 is formed on the bearing bracket 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. A plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state.

  As already described, the bottom portion of the housing recess (game board housing portion) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 penetrates in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and is opened to the back side of the inner frame base body 50. A window hole 52 is formed, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 51. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80 b), and these various components are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 52. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board unit 80 will be described.

  As described above, the back block 80b is attached to the back of the game area forming body 80a. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 that is opened on the game area forming body 80a side, and the base body 251 is fixed to the back surface of the game area forming body 80a, thereby forming a game area. The body 80a and the back block 80b are integrated.

  The front side of the base body 251 is an arrangement area for a movable production mechanism, a decorative member capable of emitting light, and the like, and the back side thereof is a control device for controlling these various components and the variable display unit 252 (design display device). 253).

  More specifically, a part of the base body 251 protrudes toward the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the symbol display device 253 (see FIG. 6) described above with respect to the protruding portion, and the symbol display device. A display control device for driving 253 is attached. The symbol display device 253 and the display control device are arranged so that the symbol display device is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50). Furthermore, a notification / production control device 140 is mounted on the back surface of the base body 251 so as to be positioned behind the display control device.

  The notification / production control device 140 includes a notification / production control board that controls sound output, lamp display, and control of the display control device in accordance with instructions from the main control device described later. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 141 made of a resin material or the like.

  A main controller unit 160 is provided below the notification / production control device 140 so as to cover the base body 96 from behind. The main controller unit 160 includes a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the back of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the back block 80b), and a main control unit 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. Yes. The main controller 162 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 163 made of, for example.

  The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be opened by a box sealing portion 164 serving as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided on the short side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used for sealing processing.

  Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened. However, by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that forms the box sealing portion 164, the box sealing portion 164 The base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed. Even after opening, the sealing process can be performed again. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole portion among the plurality of box sealing portions 164. When the substrate box 163 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, a connecting portion between the box sealing portion into which the locking pin is inserted and the substrate box 163 main body. Disconnect. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the substrate box 163 are separated, and the internal main control substrate can be taken out. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If the history of opening the substrate box 163 is left in the substrate box 163, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 163.

  The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected by a base seal part 165 so that they cannot be opened. Specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has a locking hole portion and a locking pin similarly to the box sealing portion 164, and the locking pin is inserted into the locking hole portion so that the board box 163 and The mounting base 161 is coupled so as not to be separable. This makes it easier to grasp the fact that the substrate box 163 has been illegally removed.

  A portion of the front surface of the base body 251 facing the lower rear portion of the game area forming body 80a corresponds to the game board opening of the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b and downstream. A collection passage (not shown) that collects in one place on the side is formed. Thereby, all the game balls won in the general winning opening 81 etc. are gathered below the game board unit 80 through the collection passage. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting game balls won in various winning ports.

  A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 80 by the collection passage are led out into the discharge passage. Similarly, the out port 89 leads to the discharge passage, and a game ball that has not won any winning port is led out into the discharge passage through the out port 89.

  In addition, the base body 251 constituting the back block 80b includes a general winning port detection sensor for detecting a game ball won in the general winning port 81, and an operating port 83a as the detection sensors for the respective winning portions. , 83b and a detection sensor for an operating port that detects a game ball that has entered the game ball, and a winning detection mechanism is constituted by these various detection sensors. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main controller 162, and detection information (detection signals) is output from the respective detection sensors to the main controller 162.

  Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as a main body of the back pack unit 15, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. .

  The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and as shown in FIG. 10, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. 212. The protective cover part 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 252 (see FIG. 9).

  An external output terminal plate 213 is provided on the upper portion of the base portion 211. Various output terminals are provided on the external output terminal plate 213, and wirings WH1 that connect the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side and the pachinko machine 10 are connected to the output terminals. Various signals output from the external output terminal plate 213 (output terminal) of the pachinko machine 10 are transmitted to the hall computer HC through the wiring WH1, and the hall computer HC indicates the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the game situation based on these various signals. It is the structure to grasp.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latch pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the bearings provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the inner frame 13 by being inserted through the portion 133. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixing levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted, and the base portion 211 is contacted from the rear in a state where the fixing levers 134 are inserted through the insertion portions. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contact.

  In the base portion 211, a payout mechanism portion 202 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and that opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. The A tank rail 222 that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

  The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to any one of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, and a discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper plate 33 through the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower plate 34 through the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage. Has been.

  At the lower end portion of the base portion 211, the discharge passage board and the control device collective unit 204 are attached so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction. In the discharge passage board, a discharge passage opened rearward is formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and an open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game ball led to the discharge passage from the recovery passage described above passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Discharged.

  The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, and a payout control device 242 and a power supply / launch control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply / launch control device 243 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is accommodated in the board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam is eliminated.

  The power / fire control device 243 has a power / fire control board accommodated in a board box 246. A predetermined power source required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the power source / launch control board, and further, control of launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the game ball launch handle 41 by the player is performed. Specifically, drive control of the solenoid 111 constituting the game ball launching mechanism 110 and drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

  Further, the power source / launch control device 243 is provided with a power switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched to the on state (on state) or the shut off state (off state).

  Here, this pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing various data, and even if a power failure occurs, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure. It can be done. For example, when the power supply is shut down by a normal procedure as in the case of a game hall being closed, the state before the shutdown is stored and held. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166 provided in the main controller 162, the RAM data is initialized.

  These various switches can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by opening the gaming machine main part 12 (inner frame 13) and exposing the back side of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the opening of the gaming machine main part 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. In other words, the various switches are difficult to operate when the gaming machine main part 12 is closed, and are operated from the front side of the gaming machine by a person who does not own the key for the locking device 75 (for example, a fraudster). Making it difficult.

(Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block of FIG.

  An MPU 402 is mounted on a main control board 401 provided in the main controller 162. The MPU 402 is a ROM 403 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 402 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 403. The RAM 404 is an element incorporating an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 402, for example, the function of the ROM 403 and the function of the RAM 404 may be provided as separate elements.

  The MPU 402 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 402 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 405 provided in the main controller 162, a payout controller 242 and various detection sensors. The power failure monitoring board 405 is connected to a power source / launch control device 243, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power failure monitoring board 405.

  As a part of various detection sensors, a winning detection sensor 391a for detecting a winning (winning) in the general winning opening 81, a winning detection sensor 391b for detecting a winning (winning) in the variable winning device 82, and an upper operation A ball detection sensor 391c for detecting a ball (winning) at the mouth 83a, a ball detection sensor 391d for detecting a ball (winning) at the lower operating port 83b, and a ball (winning) at the through gate 84 are detected. The winning detection sensor 391e is connected, and the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 performs a winning determination (entrance determination) for each winning portion. In addition, the MPU 402 executes a lottery occurrence lottery based on the winnings to the upper working port 83a and the lower working port 83b, and executes the support generating lottery based on the winnings to the through gate 84.

  On the output side of the MPU 402, a power failure monitoring board 405, a payout control device 242 and a notification / effect control device 140 are connected. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 242 based on a winning determination result to the winning-corresponding winning portion such as the operation ports 83a and 83b described above. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out 10 gaming balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 82 is specified, 15 gaming balls are output. When the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the game is output and the winning to the upper operating port 83a is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output and the winning to the lower operating port 83b is received. When specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output from the main control device 162 to the notification / production control device 140. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 402, a variable winning drive unit that opens and closes an opening / closing body (for example, a shutter member 88) of the variable winning device 82, an electric combination drive unit that opens and closes an electric combination 91 of the lower working port 83b, and A main display unit 87 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 401, and the MPU 402 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 402 performs drive control of the variable winning drive unit so that the variable winning device 82 is opened and closed. In addition, when the support lottery of the electric accessory 91 is won, drive control of the electric accessory driving unit is executed in the MPU 402 so that the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. Further, the display control of the main display unit D of the main display unit 87 is executed by the MPU 402.

  Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402, and through this external output terminal board 213, information on the entrance to various entrances to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side. Information on the lottery results such as the jackpot and the jackpot is output. As a result, the hall computer HC can grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10, the game situation, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring board 405 relays the main control board 401 and the power / fire control device 243. The power failure monitoring board 405 has a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 243. The function to monitor is given. The payout control device 242 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

  The power / launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 401, the payout controller 242 and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power supply / launch control device 243 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The notification / production control device 140 is provided with a notification / production control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU includes a ROM that stores various control programs executed by the MPU and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM is executed. A certain RAM and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM and RAM are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU. The MPU of the notification / production control device 140 controls the driving of the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162 and the display control device. 410 is controlled.

  The display control device 410 executes display control of the symbol display device 253 based on the command input from the notification / effect control device 140. In this case, in the notification / production control device 140, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the symbol variation display mode (for example, presence / absence of reach generation, contents of reach production, etc.) and symbols in the symbol display device 253. The stop display mode (the type of symbol combination that is finally stopped and displayed when the variable display is ended) is determined.

Here, the configuration related to the variable display of symbols of each game time and the content of the variable display will be described. In the following description, FIGS. 12 and 13 are referred to as appropriate. 12 and 13 are schematic diagrams for explaining display contents on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253.
For convenience of explanation, illustration of a background image and the like displayed on the display screen 253a is omitted.

  The display control device 410 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, nine types of main symbol data (refer to FIGS. 12 (a) to (i)) with numbers “1” to “9”, and sub symbol data without numbers. (See FIG. 12J) is stored in advance.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (a), on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. On the display screen 253a, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

  In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, the display screen 253a is configured such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be. The display screen 253a has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lower line L4, and a right upper line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination with the same number) is formed on any one of the effective lines. If the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in the state, the big hit video is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probability variation jackpot result.

  In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 symbol rows), the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or third symbol row).

  Among the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols” and have even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8). The main symbol corresponds to “non-specific symbol”. When the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, for example, the same specific symbol combination and the same non-specific symbol combination are stopped and displayed. Further, when a normal jackpot result is obtained, for example, the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the display mode of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 253 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. For example, a plurality of symbol sequences may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence may be set to the vertical direction.

  In the lower part of the display screen 253a, more specifically, below the variable display area ME composed of the variable display area for the upper symbol row, the variable display region for the middle symbol row and the variable display region for the lower symbol row, The area is set. The hold display area is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum hold number when a game ball wins the upper operation opening 83a is arranged in the left-right direction, and the same number as the hold information related to the upper operation opening 83a. The number-of-holds display area Da for the upper operating port capable of displaying the image for holding in the unit display area, and the number of unit-holding display areas equal to the maximum number of held when the game ball wins the lower operating port 83b are arranged in the horizontal direction. In this way, the same number of hold images as the hold information related to the lower operation port 83b are displayed in the unit display region, and the hold number display region Db for the lower operation port and the variable display region ME are executed. It is comprised by the execution object display area which can display the image for a hold | maintenance corresponding to a game time inside.

  More specifically, when the game ball wins the upper operation port 83a, the maximum number of reservations is four, and in correspondence with this, the upper operation port reservation number display area Da includes a first unit reservation display area, A second unit hold display area, a third unit hold display area, and a fourth unit hold display area are set. In addition, when the game ball wins the lower operation port 83b, the maximum number of reservations is four. Correspondingly, the lower operation port reservation number display region Db includes a first unit reservation display region, A unit hold display area, a third unit hold display area, and a fourth unit hold display area are set.

  For example, when the number of holds when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 83a is 1, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area, and the game ball is displayed in the upper operation port 83a. When the number of holds when winning is four, a predetermined hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area to the fourth unit hold display area. FIG. 11B illustrates a case where the number of reserves in the upper operation port 83a is 3, and the number of reservations in the lower operation port 83b is 2. In the following description, “holding number” is also simply referred to as “holding number”.

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 402 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform a jackpot occurrence lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 87 (main display unit D), setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 253, and more specifically, As shown in FIG. 14, the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the big hit occurs, the hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type such as the probability variation big hit result and the normal big hit result, and the symbol display device 253 The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when the deviation fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the pictures in the display portions UD and LD for the operation ports of the main display unit 87 Fluctuation display time and symbol variation display time on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 (temporary stop to be described later) It is set to be used and variation type counter CS to determine the I demonstration execution time) contains between. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 91 in the lower working port 83b is in an electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 404. The RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 including an upper working port holding area Ra, a lower working port holding area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total reserved number storage area.

  The holding ball storage area 432 includes a holding area including a holding area Ra for the upper working port and a holding area Rb for the lower working port, and an execution area AE. Each holding area Ra, Rb includes a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and a lottery counter buffer 431 according to a winning history of the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. Each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in is stored in any one of the first area to the fourth area as the hold information. Note that the hold information corresponds to special information.

  In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth area when the winning to the upper working port 83a or the lower working port 83b is continuously generated a plurality of times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in order of area. By providing four areas in this way, a maximum of four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b are held and stored. Further, the reserved ball storage area 432 is provided with a total number-of-holds storage area, and the total number-of-holds storage area specifies the number in which the winning history for the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b is stored in a stored state. To store information.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the holding area when starting the variable display of the picture on the display units UD, LD for the operation port of the main display unit 87. At the start of one game round, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Specifically, each counter is configured so that the hit random number counter C1 is incremented by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 83a or the lower operation port 83b. More specifically, when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 83a, the RAM 404 is stored in the upper operation port holding area Ra, and when the game ball is won in the lower operation port 83b, the lower operation port holding area Rb of the RAM 404 is stored. Stored in

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 421 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 403. As shown in FIG. 15, as the success / failure table, a success / failure table for low probability mode (a low probability success / failure information group) and a high probability mode success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) are set. . That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15A) is referred to at the time of the lottery, the random value (that is, the winning information) for winning the jackpot is “7”, “307”. , “507”. That is, “7”, “307”, and “507” among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of “0 to 599” correspond to the jackpot result. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15B) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot (that is, the winning information) is “7”, “ 36 ”,“ 107 ”,“ 307 ”...“ 407 ”,“ 507 ”. There are 30 “598”. In other words, “7”, “36”, “107”, “307”... “407”, “507”, “598” correspond to the jackpot result among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of “0 to 599”. ing. Incidentally, if the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  Note that, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the random number value that is a big win.

  The hit type counter C2 is configured such that 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are different in two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the success / failure lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode by the electric accessory 91 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. .

  As a support mode by the electric accessory 91 attached to the lower operating port 83b, when compared with a situation in which the game ball is continuously being emitted in the same manner with respect to the game area PE, the electric function of the lower operating port 83b is The low frequency support mode (the low frequency support state or the low frequency guide state) and the high frequency support mode (the high frequency support state or the high frequency are set so that the frequency at which the object 91 is opened per unit time is relatively high. Guide state) is set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same. In the support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 91 is in the open state when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric utility item 91 occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Has been.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the lower working port 83b than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be generated in the upper operating port 83a than in the lower operating port 83b. However, in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 83b is connected to the lower operating port 83b. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower operating port 83b, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls. be able to.

  Note that the specific configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time in the high frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the electric component release It is good also as a structure which makes high the probability of becoming the electric character open state winning in a lottery. Further, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode may be set by making any one condition or any combination of conditions among the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability different.

  The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the game ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 83a or the lower operation port 83b. More specifically, when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 83a, the RAM 404 is stored in the upper operation port holding area Ra, and when the game ball is won in the lower operation port 83b, the lower operation port holding area Rb of the RAM 404 is stored. Stored in

  The game result distribution destination for the win type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 422 as a distribution information group storage unit in the ROM 403. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. As the distribution table, an upper working port distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 16 (a) and a lower working port distribution table (second distribution table) shown in FIG. 16 (b). Minute information group).

  In the distribution table for the upper working port, as the distribution destination of the game result, 8R probability variation jackpot result (high probability special game result), 8R normal jackpot result (low probability special game result), 4R probability variation jackpot result (high (Probability corresponding game result), 4R normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding game result) is set. Specifically, in the allocation table for the upper working ports, “0 to 8” of the values of the hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29” corresponds to the 8R probability variation big hit result, and “9 to 14”. "Corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result," 15 to 23 "corresponds to the 4R probability variable jackpot result, and" 24 to 29 "corresponds to the 4R normal jackpot result.

  In the distribution table for the lower operating port, as the distribution destination of the game result, the 16R probability variation jackpot result (special game result corresponding to high probability), 8R probability variation jackpot result (special game result corresponding to high probability), 8R normal jackpot result (low Probability corresponding special game result), 4R probability variable jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result), 4R normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding game result) are set. Specifically, in the distribution table for the lower working port, “0 to 5” among the values of the hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29” corresponds to the 16R probability variation big hit result, and “6 to 11”. "Corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot result," 12-17 "corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result," 18-23 "corresponds to the 4R probability variation jackpot result," 24-29 " Corresponds to 4R normal jackpot results.

  The 16R probability variation jackpot result, the 8R probability variation jackpot result, and the 4R probability variation jackpot result are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. As shown in FIG. 16C, the high-frequency support mode is continued until the next jackpot result is reached, and the mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode with the start of the opening / closing execution mode.

  The 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, as shown in FIG. 16 (c), this high-frequency support mode has a jackpot result when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode reaches the end reference number or before the end reference number is reached. When it becomes (specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode is started), it ends and shifts to the low frequency support mode. As the end reference number, any one of five times of 10, 20, 30, 50, and 100 is set. In the present embodiment, it is difficult to identify how long the high-frequency support mode continues by making the end reference count hidden and hiding the end timing of the high-frequency support mode. This is a device that suppresses monotonization of the game in the high-frequency support mode.

  By the way, as described above, in the case of a probable change jackpot result, a combination of symbols similar to the normal jackpot result is finally stopped (determined display) on the display screen 253a to identify whether it is normal / probable change. It is configured to be difficult. However, when the high-frequency support mode continues for more than 100 times, it is clear from the behavior of the electric accessory 91 that the high-frequency support mode is based on the probability variation jackpot result.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 83a or the lower operation port 83b. More specifically, when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 83a, the RAM 404 is stored in the upper operation port holding area Ra, and when the game ball is won in the lower operation port 83b, the lower operation port holding area Rb of the RAM 404 is stored. Stored in Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403, it is determined whether to generate a reach.

  However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the game result corresponds to the open / close execution mode. In a gaming machine in which the display result after the change display can be a special display result in the game times that are the game results, the stop display result after the display (or variable display) of the pattern (picture) on the pattern display device 253 is started. This is a display state for making the player think that the state is a variable display state in which the special display result is likely to be obtained before the derivation is displayed.

  In other words, a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode can be established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. This is a display state in which a reach symbol combination having a characteristic is displayed, and in that state, a symbol variation display is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode can be established on a preset active line in the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 as a step before ending the symbol variation display. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a reachable symbol combination, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents on the display screen 253a will be described in more detail. First, when the symbol variation display is finished in the upper symbol row, and the symbol variation display is finished in the lower symbol row, the symbol combination hits any effective line. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols to which the numbers constituting the are attached, and the reach display is performed by changing the symbols in the middle symbol row in the situation where the reach line is formed. It becomes. When a big hit occurs, the symbols in the middle symbol row are displayed in a variable manner so that the main symbols with the numbers constituting the winning symbol combination are stopped on the reach line together with the main symbols forming the reach line. Is terminated.

  In the reach display, the reach design combination is displayed as described above, and the change display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol sequences, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. And a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 253a after the reach symbol combination is reduced or hidden. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. In the MPU 402, the variation type counter CS displays the variation display time in the upper working port display unit and the lower working port display unit of the main display unit 87 (main display unit D) and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 253. Used in determining. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the variation display in the upper working port display unit and the lower working port display unit and determining the variation pattern at the time of the symbol variation start by the symbol display device 253.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250), it returns to 0. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination holding area 433 of the RAM 404 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 91 of the lower working port 83b to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 91 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 91 is not controlled to the open state.

  As already described, the MPU 402 determines the variation display time in the upper working port display unit and the lower working port display unit using at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS. A variable display time table storage area 423 is used. Further, the MPU 402 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop result in the upper working port display unit and the lower working port display unit. However, the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403 is used for the determination.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed when the game is advanced by the MPU 402 in the main controller 162 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 402 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Explanation of these various processes is omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 402 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various winning detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391e) are read. That is, the state of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the winning detection sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

  In the subsequent step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

  In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning through the through gate 84 is executed. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the electric utility reservation area 433. On the condition that the number of stored accessory holdings is less than 4, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in the step S103 is stored in the electronic combination holding area. If the through-gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435, the winning detection flag is deleted and the through-gate winning process is terminated.

  After performing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105. In step S105, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning to the operating ports 83a and 83b is performed, and this timer interrupt process is completed. To do.

(Prize processing for working port)
Here, the winning process for the operation port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (wins) the upper working port 83a. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out three game balls is set.

  In the subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the upper operation port 83a to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a ball has entered the upper working port 83a. In the subsequent step S204, the value corresponding to the upper working port 83a is read from the reserved number storage area, and this value is set to the start reserved memory number RaN stored in the reserved area Ra (hereinafter referred to as the upper operating port reserved memory). Number RaN). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing each value such as the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper working port 83a, the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (wins) the lower operation port 83b. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the lower operation port 83b, the process proceeds to step S207, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out four game balls is set. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in an external output process S401 of a normal process described later.

  In the subsequent step S208, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the lower operation port 83b to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a ball has entered the lower working port 83b. In the subsequent step S209, a value corresponding to the lower operating port 83b is read from the reserved number storage area, and this value is set to the start reserved memory number RbN stored in the reserved area Rb (hereinafter referred to as reserved memory for the lower operating port). Number RbN). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing each value such as the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning processing is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in both steps S201 and S206, that is, if there is no entry in either the upper working port 83a or the lower working port 83b, the main winning process is terminated.

  Here, the information acquisition processing in step S205 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the operation holding storage number N stored in the holding number storage area of the holding ball storage area 432, specifically, the trigger of the information acquisition process among the upper operation port 83a and the lower operation port 83b. It is determined whether or not the number N of pending action storages (RaN or RbN above) relating to the incoming ball section is less than the upper limit (“4” in the present embodiment). If the operation hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the operation hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the operation hold storage number N of the corresponding operation opening is incremented by 1 in step S302. In step S303, the total number of holds stored in the hold number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common hold number CRN) is incremented by one.

  In the following step S304, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S103 are determined from the free storage area area of the holding area RE for the working port. The first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common hold number CRN incremented by 1 in step S302 is stored.

  That is, when the start pending storage number RaN for the upper working port is set, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S103. Are stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the upper working port holding area Ra, that is, in the holding area Ra corresponding to the starting working storage number RaN for the upper working port incremented by 1 in step S302.

  When the start pending storage number RbN for the lower working port is set, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are set as the lower working port. Is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the reserved area Rb for use, that is, in the reserved area Rb corresponding to the starting reserved memory number RbN for the lower operating port incremented by 1 in step S302.

  After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, display update processing is executed for the number-of-holds display section of the main display unit 87. In the display update process, when the current winning destination (winning destination) is the upper operating port 83a, the display of the holding number display section for the upper operating port is updated, and the current incoming destination (winning destination) is operated downward. In the case of the port 83b, the display of the reserved number display section for the lower operation port is updated.

  About each number-of-holds display part, it is constituted by four LEDs, and the number of LEDs that are lit in the number-of-holds display part, the number of holds related to the upper operation port 83a, and the number of reservations related to the lower operation port 83b. The configuration is consistent. When the number of reserves related to the upper operation port 83a increases due to the winning of this time, a process of increasing the number of LEDs lit in the hold number display section for the upper operation port is performed accordingly, and the lower operation port 83b When the number of such holdings increases, processing is performed to increase the number of LEDs that are lit in the holding number display section for the lower working port accordingly.

  In subsequent step S306 and step S307, the notification / production control device 140 and the display control device 410, which are control devices on the sub-side (sub-side), recognize that the winning of the operation ports 83a and 83b has occurred, and a hold described later. A confirmation process for holding notice and a setting process for holding command, which are processes for executing a notice, are executed, and this information acquisition process is terminated. Note that the hold command includes information on which one of the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b is based on winning.

  The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S307 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 and the display control device 410 in a normal process external output process (step S401) described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S401 to S406 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S408 and S409 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process in step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side and the hall computer HC.

  Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242. Further, when various commands such as a change command such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, a hold command and a shift command described later are set, the command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140. .

  Further, as will be described in detail later, for example, an external signal indicating symbol confirmation is output to the hall computer HC every time the change display of the pattern is finished on the display units UD and LD for the operation port of the main display unit D, and opening and closing is executed In the mode, an external signal indicating that the switching execution mode is in effect is output to the hall computer HC, and in the case of the high frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the mode is in the high frequency support mode is output to the hall computer HC. To do.

  Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

  In subsequent step S403, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 253, display control of the main display unit 87, and the like are performed.

  After executing the game times control process of step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, and the game state transition process is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state transitions to the opening / closing execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing. Details of the game turn control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S405, a power support process for driving and controlling the motor combination 91 provided in the lower working port 83b is executed. In this electric role support process, the electric role release indicating whether or not to make the electric accessory 91 open using the numerical information acquired from the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 433 of the RAM 404. A lottery is performed, and when the electrified open state is won, an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 91 is executed. In addition, display control of the through gate display unit in the main display unit D is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role release lottery.

  As already described, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as modes of support by the electric accessory 91, and a transition to any one of the support modes is performed in the gaming state transition process. After this processing, the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and the low frequency support mode is set when the flag is not set.

  In the power combination support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. In the case of the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is won, the number of times that the electric utility item 91 is in the open state is set larger than in the case of the low frequency support mode. Set a longer opening time. In the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric utility item 91 occurs multiple times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time until is set to be shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, in step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is provided once every predetermined interval period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power source / launch control device 243. Is excited. Thereby, a game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

  In subsequent step S407, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not one cycle (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing.

  That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 404. In step S409, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 404.

  Since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 varies depending on the game state, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

(Game control process)
Next, the game times control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  In the game times control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined in step S501 whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. When the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process after step S502, that is, the game turn start process at steps S503 to S505 and the game turn progress process at steps S506 to S509 are not executed. The control process ends.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether the game is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation port display portions UD and LD of the main display unit 87 are in a variable display or a fixed display. If the game is not being played, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S503 to S505. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the total number of start holding balls (common holding number CRN) is “0”. The case where the common holding number CRN is “0” means that the holding information is not stored in the holding ball storage area 432. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the common hold number CRN is not “0”, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 432 for variable display in step S504, Further, in step S505, after executing the variation start process for starting the variation display of the display unit for the working port in the main display unit 87 and the variation display of the symbol display device 253, the game number control process is terminated.

  Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the change start process in step S505 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, the number of working hold storage numbers N stored in the hold number storage area, which is the target of the current setting process, and the common hold number CRN are decremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of hold information held in the lower working port holding area Rb (see FIG. 14), that is, the working holding memory number N (lower working port holding memory number RbN) is “0”. To do. When the lower working port reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process related to the upper working port display unit UD is executed. When the lower working port reserved memory number RbN is not “0”, Data setting processing related to the working port display unit LD is executed.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the common pending number is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the lower working port reserved storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the lower working port display section LD is held for variable display. When the information is stored, the number of the hold information stored in the upper working port holding area Ra (see FIG. 14), that is, the operation holding memory number N (the upper working port holding memory number RaN) is obtained. Regardless of whether it is 1 or more, the data stored in the lower working port holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE for variable display. That is, in step S602, when the hold information is stored in both the upper working port holding area Ra and the lower working port holding area Rb, the holding information corresponding to the lower working port 83b is given priority. It becomes.

  In the subsequent step S603, the data stored in the first to fourth areas is stored for the data moved to the execution area AE out of the upper working port holding area Ra and the lower working port holding area Rb. Are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Thus, for example, in accordance with the movement of the data of the first area to the execution area AE, the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, etc. Data is shifted.

  In the subsequent step S604, a shift command is set which is information for causing the notification / production control device 140 to recognize that the data of the holding areas Ra and Rb has been shifted. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The shift command is transmitted to the display control device 410 via the notification / production control device 140.

(Variation start processing)
Next, the variation start process of step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the change start process, first, in step S701, a success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the hold information referred to in the current change start process corresponds to the big win is executed. Specifically, the information for determining the jackpot among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode, referring to the winning table for the low probability mode stored in the winning table storage area 421 of the ROM 403, the grasped information becomes the information corresponding to the big hit winning. If it is determined that the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, referring to the high probability mode success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 421 of the ROM 403, the grasped information is a big hit. Identify whether it is included in the information corresponding to the winning.

  In the subsequent step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination process in step S701 is a result corresponding to the big win. If the result corresponds to the big win, the type determination process is executed in step S703.

  In the type determination process, the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information acquired from the hit type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 422 of the ROM 403, it is specified whether the grasped type determination information is included in the information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, when the hold information corresponds to the entry into the upper operation port 83a, the distribution table for the upper operation port 83a is referred to, and the hold information corresponds to the entry into the lower operation port 83b. If it is, the type is determined with reference to the distribution table for the lower working port 83b.

  In the subsequent step S704, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot winning type is a probability variation jackpot result (16R probability variation jackpot result, 8R probability variation jackpot result, 4R probability variation jackpot result) based on the information specified in the type determination processing in step S703. judge. If it is the probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for probability variation jackpot is executed in step S705, and if it is not the probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed in step S706. If it is determined in step S702 that it is not a big win, a stop result setting process for losing is executed in step S707.

  The probability variation jackpot results are roughly classified into 16R probability variation jackpot results, 8R probability variation jackpot results, and 4R probability variation jackpot results. In the process of step S705, in the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result is performed, and in the case of an 8R probability variation jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot result is performed. In the case of a 4R probability variation jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 4R probability variation jackpot result is performed. The regular jackpot results are roughly divided into 8R regular jackpot results and 4R regular jackpot results. In the process of step S706, in the case of the 8R normal jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result is performed. In the case of the 4R normal jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result is performed. Do.

  In each stop result setting process in step S705 to step S707, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403 is referred to for information on the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 87. The specified information is stored in the RAM 404. Further, in step S705 and step S706, information for specifying in the MPU 402 that the determination result of whether or not this game is successful is a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S705, either a 16R probability variable jackpot flag, an 8R probability variable jackpot flag, or a 4R probability variable jackpot flag is stored. In step S706, either an 8R normal jackpot flag or a 4R normal jackpot flag is stored.

  After executing any one of steps S705 to S707, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S708.

(Variable display time setting process)
In the variable display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24A, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 4R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the result of the above-mentioned lottery determination is a losing result, the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, it is determined whether or not reach display is generated in the symbol display device 253 in the current game round. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S802 as occurrence of reach display. When specifying the presence / absence of reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 403 is referred to.

  If an affirmative determination is made in either step S801 or step S802, the process proceeds to step S803, and the current generation is displayed with reference to the reach generation variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. Fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS and the like is acquired, and in the subsequent step S804, the fluctuation display time information is provided in the fluctuation display time counter area (variation display time measuring means provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404). ) To the variable display time counter. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the lottery win is a jackpot winning result or when the result of the same lottery is a missed result and the lottery for generating the reach is won. ing.

  Here, the reach display includes a normal reach display (specifically normal reach A to B) and a super reach display (specifically super reach A to C). The variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set in the variable display time table for reach generation. By referring to the table, the variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is set. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS. By referring to the table, the value of the current variation type counter CS is determined. The corresponding reach display is determined.

  More specifically, the reach generation variation display time table corresponds to the jackpot type. Specifically, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot result, the variable display time is set so that a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed, and in the case of a normal jackpot result, a non-specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed. The variable display time is set.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802, the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to with reference to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 in step S805. In step S806, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter in the variable display time counter area. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The variable display time when no reach occurs is set to be shorter as the number of stored hold information (common hold number CRN) is larger. Specifically, in the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence that is referred to during the low-frequency support mode, 1 sec, “3” when the number of stored hold information (hold number) is “4”. 3 seconds, 5 seconds or 7 seconds for “2”, 11 seconds or 13 seconds for “1”, 15 seconds or 17 seconds for “0” (FIG. 24 ( b)). On the other hand, in the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence that is referred to during the high frequency support mode, 1 sec when the number of stored hold information (holding number) is “2” to “4”. Alternatively, it is specified to be 5 sec, 2 sec or 5 sec for “1”, 5 sec or 8 sec for “0” (see FIG. 24C).

  In the high frequency support mode, the number of pieces of holding information related to the lower operation port 83b is increased as long as the frequency of entering the lower operation port 83b is increased by the support by the electric accessory 91 and the game ball is fired to the right route. Will change from “2” to “4”. On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, the hold information related to the upper operation port 83a is mainly used, and the number of hold information changes from about “0” to “3”. As a result, the game progress in the high frequency support mode is differentiated so as to be faster than the game progress in the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the low frequency support mode, the set display time of the pattern is 2 sec, whereas in the high frequency support mode, the set display time of the pattern is set to 1 sec. It has been shortened. Thereby, further speeding up of game progress is realized.

  When comparing the non-reachable variable display time table for low-frequency support mode with the non-reachable variable display time table for high-frequency support mode, the variable display time in high-frequency support mode is generally better. It is set to be shorter. When the reach non-occurrence variable display time table corresponding to the high frequency support mode is referred to, a predetermined ratio (5% in the present embodiment) is set to 5 sec regardless of the number of holdings. Is set. This is a device that suppresses excessive speeding up and monotonization of the game progress in the high frequency support mode, and the symbol display device 253 uses this variable display time to produce a branching effect described later (not corresponding to reach display development). Will be executed.

  Incidentally, the configuration relating to the setting of the variable display time is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of common pending numbers CRN may be employed, and the variable display time may be set shorter as the number of common pending numbers CRN is smaller. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. Although the generation variation display time table is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation display time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variable display time that is easily selected and the variable display time that is difficult to select are different at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach. It is good also as a structure. Also, a variation display time table for probability variation jackpot, a variation display time table for normal jackpot, a variation display time table for outreach, and a variation display time table for complete losing may be set individually.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 23), after the variation display time setting process is executed in step S708, a variation start command and a type command are set in step S709. The change start command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The type command includes game result information. In other words, in the type command, as information on game results, information on 16R probability variation jackpot results, information on 8R probability variation jackpot results, information on 4R probability variation jackpot results, information on 8R regular jackpot results, information on 4R ordinary jackpot results, outlier results This information is included.

  The variation start command and type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). Based on the received change start command and type command, the notification / production control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 29 in the game time, and the content of the determined production. The lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 are controlled so as to be executed. In addition, based on the received variation start command and type command, the notification / production control device 140 determines the details of the game effect such as the symbol variation display pattern on the symbol display device 253 in the game time, and determines them. The information is added to the change start command and the type command and transmitted to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 displays the symbol display device 253 so that the game effect (display effect) is executed in the manner determined by the notification / effect control device 140 based on the received variation start command and type command. Control.

  Thereafter, in step S710, the display of variation of the pattern is started on the corresponding one of the upper working port display portion UD and the lower working port display portion LD of the main display unit 87, and then the present variation start processing is terminated. . In addition, it is also possible to employ a configuration in which the variable display of the pattern or the like is started before the lottery is executed.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 21), when the main display unit 87 is in the variable display mode, the game times progress process of steps S506 to S509 is executed. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the current game time fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (variable display time information) of the variable display time counter provided in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 404 is “0”. The value is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 24) as described above. The set value is decremented (subtracted) by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display process, the display mode of the corresponding one of the upper working port display portion UD and the lower working port display portion LD of the main display unit 87 is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the change display time has elapsed, change end processing is executed in step S508. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 404 in any of the processes in steps S705 to S707 is specified, and the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the upper working port display unit UD and the lower working port display unit LD. The corresponding operation port display unit is controlled so that the corresponding one of them is stopped (determined).

  In the subsequent step S509, a change end command is set. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. The variation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification / production control device 140 transmits the received change end command to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 410 receives the change end command, and finally displays (final stop display) the final stop symbol combination in the game round.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the game state transition process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when one game round is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a preset stop display time (determined display time) has elapsed since the variable display is ended in one of the operation port display portions UD and LD of the main display portion D. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S903, and it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game round (the result of the above-mentioned lottery determination) corresponds to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 4R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. To do. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, start processing of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S904. By the start process, the operation restriction of the variable winning device 82 by the lock device is released, and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 82 is permitted until the opening / closing execution mode is ended. In the start process of step S904, an opening / closing execution mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and output of an external signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress is started to the hall computer HC of the game hall. In step S901, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode is in effect based on the presence / absence of the opening / closing execution mode flag.

  In the subsequent step S905, any one of “4”, “8”, and “16” is set in the open number counter OC provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, “16” is set in the release number counter OC, and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag or the When the 8R normal jackpot flag is stored, “8” is set in the release number counter OC, and when the 4R probability variable jackpot flag or 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, the number is released. Set "4" to the number counter OC. The number-of-opening counter OC functions as a means for grasping the number of times the variable winning device 82 has been opened. After executing the process of step S905, the process proceeds to step S506, and an opening command is set.

  The set opening command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 and the display control device 410 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification / production control device 140 determines the content of the production corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed. The contents of the effect include a display mode in the symbol display device 253, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. In the display control device 410, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / production control device 140, the display content corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 253 is executed so that the moving image display of the character, etc., the background image, etc. are switched. After executing the process of step S906, the gaming state transition process ends.

  Returning to the description of step S901, if it is determined in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. When the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, in step S908, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed.

  In the big prize opening / closing process, it is first determined whether or not the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device 82 is open. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit of the variable winning device 82. If the special winning opening is not open, it is determined whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is “0”. When the value of the number-of-opening counter OC is “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is.

  When the value of the release number counter OC is not “0”, it is determined whether or not the value of the release timer counter TC is “0”. The opening timer counter TC is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening period and closing period (interval period) of the special winning opening, and the value is “1” every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) is executed. Subtracted one by one. When the value of the opening timer counter TC is not “0”, the big prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  When the value of the number-of-opening counter OC is not “0” and the value of the opening timer counter TC is “0”, the process for opening the big prize opening is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit is set in a driving state so as to open the special winning opening. After that, a closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the variable winning device 82 (large winning opening) is performed. Specifically, “15000” (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the open timer counter TC, and “10” is set in the winning counter PC. After executing this setting process, an opening command is set to indicate that the variable winning device 82 (big winning opening) has been opened, and the big winning opening / closing process ends. The set release command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification / production control device 140 determines the content of the production corresponding to the release based on the receipt of the release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the big winning opening of the variable winning device 82 is open, it is determined whether or not the value of the open timer counter TC is “0”. When the value of the release timer counter TC is not “0”, it is determined based on a detection signal from the ball detection sensor 391c corresponding to the variable winning device 82 whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If a winning has occurred, a winning command output process is executed. The winning command is output to the payout control device 242 and the notification / production control device 140. The payout control device 242 performs a process of paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on receiving the winning command. In the notification / production control device 140, when a winning command is issued during the opening / closing execution mode, a process for changing the effect during the opening / closing execution mode executed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, for example, to teach the winning. Do.

  After executing the command output process, after decrementing the value of the winning counter PC by 1, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0”. The opening / closing process is terminated. If the value of the winning counter PC is “0”, or if it is determined that the value of the opening timer counter TC is “0”, it means that the big winning opening closing condition is established. In this case, the variable winning drive unit is set in a non-driven state so as to close the special winning opening.

  Subsequently, update processing of the release number counter OC is executed. Specifically, when the value of the opening number counter OC is not “0”, the opening number counter OC is decremented by 1 and when the value of the opening number counter OC is “0”, the opening number counter OC is decremented. The value of “0” is maintained as “0”. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated release number counter OC is “0”.

  When it is determined that the value of the opening number counter OC is not “0”, the opening timer counter TC is set to “1000” (corresponding to 2.0 sec), the closing command is set, and then the main prize opening opening / closing process is performed. Exit. The set closing command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). When receiving the closing command, the notification / production control device 140 determines the content of the production corresponding to the closing command and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the release counter is “0”, an ending start process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round is set for the ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 403 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

  Thereafter, after setting the ending command, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 25), after the big prize opening / closing process is executed in step S908, it is determined in step S909 whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is “0”. In S910, it is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. If the value of the release number counter OC is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the opening number counter OC is “0” and the ending waiting time has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S911.

  In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result triggered by the current opening / closing execution mode is any of 16R probability variation jackpot result, 8R probability variation jackpot result, and 4R probability variation jackpot result. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and 4R probability variation jackpot flag are stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404.

  If the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the 8R probability variation jackpot result, or the 4R probability variation jackpot result, the flag relating to the transition of the gaming state is deleted. After executing the erasure process, a game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, a high probability mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the success / failure lottery in the subsequent game times is referred to the success / failure table for the high-probability mode.

  Thereafter, the high frequency support mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, in the subsequent electronic support processing, the success / failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery, and the pattern change display time at the time of the support lottery It is shortened (more specifically, it is set to 2.0 sec), and further, the period in which it is opened by one opening is extended (more specifically, it is set to 5.0 sec).

  On the other hand, when the jackpot result triggered by the current opening / closing execution mode is the 8R normal jackpot result or the 4R normal jackpot result, that is, the 8R normal jackpot flag or the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If there is, the flag relating to the game state transition is deleted. After executing the erasure process, a game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the high frequency support mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, in the subsequent electronic support processing, the success / failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery, and the pattern change display time at the time of the support lottery It is shortened (more specifically, it is set to 2.0 sec), and further, the period in which it is opened by one opening is extended (more specifically, it is set to 5.0 sec).

  Unlike the case of the probabilistic jackpot result described above, an upper limit is set for the number of times of support in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the normal jackpot result. Specifically, any one of “10”, “20”, 30 ”,“ 50 ”, and“ 100 ”is set in the game number counter stored in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. For the 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result, 1/10 corresponds to the support count “10”, 1/10 corresponds to the support count “20”, and 1/10 corresponds to the support count “10”. 30 ”, 2/10 corresponds to the support count“ 50 ”, and 5/10 corresponds to the support count“ 100 ”. The high frequency support mode is maintained until the game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode when the set upper limit is reached. Become. In the following description, this upper limit is also referred to as an end reference number.

  After performing the gaming state setting process, in step S912, an opening / closing execution mode termination process is performed, and then the gaming state transition process is terminated. In this termination process, the open / close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 is erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the jackpot is stopped.

(Regarding the electrical configuration relating to the notification / production control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 26, supplementary explanation will be given on the electrical configuration of the notification / production control device 140 and the display control device 410.

  An MPU 442 is mounted on the notification / production control board 441 provided in the notification / production control device 140. The MPU 442 includes a ROM 443 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 442 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 443 is executed. A certain RAM 444 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 443 and the RAM 444 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 442, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and receives the game turn control commands (game turn control information) such as the change start command, the type command, and the change end command described above from the main control device 162. . Also, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command, and an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode information) such as an opening command or an ending command are received.

  As described above, the lamp units 26 to 28, the speaker unit 29, and the display control device 410 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 442. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification / production control device 140 are transmitted to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information form.

  The display controller 410 includes a display control board 471 on which an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 473 and the work RAM 474 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 472, but each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification / production control device 140 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically, Implements internal command generation for VDP475. Specifically, the MPU 472 executes a process of specifying a variation display pattern of each game time in the symbol display device 253 based on the command transmitted from the notification / production control device 140, and draws on the VDP 475 corresponding to the processing result. Execute the process. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253.

  The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 472 and fixed value data. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 472. These work data, flags and the like are stored in each area of the work RAM 474.

  The VDP 475 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 253. Since the VDP 475 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 475 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 475 adjusts the timings of the MPU 472, the video RAM 477, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 477 from the character ROM 476 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 253.

  The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing various image data such as symbols, character images, and background images displayed on the symbol display device 253. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 476 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 476. Further, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 473 is stored in the character ROM 476.

  The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 253, and the display content of the symbol display device 253 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 477.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the outline of the symbol variation display mode on the display screen 253a is determined by the notification / production control device 140 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and displayed based on the result. The details of the effect are determined by the display control device 410. Specifically, in the MPU 442 of the notification / production control device 140, a variable display control process is executed as part of a periodic process activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). An outline of the aspect and the like are determined. Here, the variable display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Variation display control processing)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S1001, whether or not a game is being played, that is, the symbol display (variable display, temporary stop display, or final stop display) for one game time is executed on the symbol display device 253. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined that the game is not being played, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not a variation start command transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the present variation display control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the fluctuation display control process is terminated after the fluctuation start process is executed in step S1003.

  Returning to the description of step S1001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the game is being played, the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the change end command transmitted from main controller 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the fluctuation display control process is terminated after executing the changing process in step S1005. The changing process is a process of executing various effects, changing the determined effects, and the like in the game times started by the change start process.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1006, and after the process for ending variation is executed in step S1006, the process for controlling variation display is terminated. In the change end process, the change display of the symbol and the effect being executed are ended so as to correspond to the hold information related to the game times (final stop display or final display). In this process, the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to produce an effect corresponding to the fixed stop. Then, after the confirmation command is output to the display control device 410, the variation ending process is ended. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the symbol display device 253 to confirm and stop the symbol based on the received confirmation command.

(Variation start processing)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28, the variation start processing in step S1003 will be supplementarily described. The variation start process is a process for starting an effect for game rotation based on the reception of the variation start command transmitted from the main controller 162.

  In the variation start process, first, the variation start command received this time is read out in step S1101, and information on the presence / absence of reach and variation display time information are specified from the command. As described above, when a change start command is transmitted from main controller 162, a type command is also transmitted. In step S1101, the type command received together with the variation start command received this time is read, and game result information such as information on the probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, or information on the miss result is specified from the command. In step S1101, from the above identified information, information on whether or not the jackpot is won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot is won, information on whether or not reach occurs if the jackpot is not won, and the variable display time Are stored in the register of the MPU 442.

  After executing the process of step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether or not the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode is in progress. If a positive determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, special effect mode processing is executed. In the present embodiment, a normal performance mode and a special performance mode are provided as performance modes in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. The special effect mode shifts when the number of games executed in the normal effect mode reaches a preset number (a specified number), and returns to the normal effect mode when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It is a configured production mode. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the time-shortage effect mode is set as the effect mode, and in the special effect mode, the effect executed in the time-shortage effect mode is diverted. It becomes the composition which is done. Here, the special effect mode processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Special effects mode processing)
In the special effect mode processing, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the special effect mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special effect mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, the game number counter for special effect mode provided in the game number counter area 462 of the RAM 444 is updated. The game number counter for the special effect mode is a counter for specifying the number of game times executed in the normal effect mode.

  After the update process is executed in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, with reference to the value of the game number counter for the special effect mode, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the normal effect mode has reached a preset number (specified number). If a negative determination is made in step S1203, the special effect mode processing is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204.

  In step S1204, a transition process to the special effect mode is performed. Specifically, a process of switching the light emitter mode of the lamp unit 26 to one corresponding to the special effect mode is performed, and a process of switching the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 to one corresponding to the special effect mode is performed. Then, a special effect mode start command is output to the display control device 410 in order to switch the background display mode and the symbol variation display mode on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 to a mode corresponding to the special effect mode. Thereafter, in step S1205, the special effect mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444, and the processing for the special effect mode ends. After the special effect mode flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 thereafter.

  Returning to the description of step S1201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, referring to a pseudo variation counter provided in the RAM 444, the number of times that pseudo variation (unit effect) described later is executed can be set in the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (10 times in the form) has been reached. If a negative determination is made in step S1206, the special effect mode processing is terminated as it is.

  If a positive determination is made in step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, the special effect mode continuous lottery process is executed. That is, when the number of unit effects executed in the special effect mode reaches the lower limit, whether or not the special effect mode can be continued is determined by lottery.

  If a continuation result is obtained in the lottery process in step S1207, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208, and the special effect mode process is terminated as it is. If the result of the lottery process in step S1207 is a non-continuation result, a negative determination is made in step S1208, and the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, the special effect mode end flag is set in various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. When the special effect mode end flag is set, the effect mode is switched from the special effect mode to the normal effect mode at the end of the current game round.

  Then, after executing the predetermined number of times of resetting process in step S1210, the special effect mode process is terminated. A plurality of candidates are provided for the specified number of times, and in the resetting process, one of the candidates is selected by lottery. By adopting such a configuration, diversification of spans from the end of the special effect mode to the transition to the next special effect mode is realized.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process in FIG. 28 again, after executing the special effect mode process in step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the special effect mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S1104, the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, the effect determination process for the normal effect mode is executed based on the information grasped in step S1101.

  Specifically, when the game result of the game round that starts this time is a game result corresponding to the jackpot result (that is, the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result), the jackpot effect setting process is executed. In the jackpot presentation setting process, the final stop result of the jackpot symbol is determined (final stop result determination process is performed). In the final stop result determination process, when it is a probabilistic jackpot result, a combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) or non-specific symbols (even numbers have been added) on one effective line L1 to L5 The stop result in which the combination of the main symbols) is finally displayed is determined as the stop result of this game. In the case of a normal jackpot result, a stop result in which the combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with an even number) is finally stopped and displayed on one active line L1 to L5, Determine as the final stop result.

  The types of main symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 that are finally stopped and displayed when the jackpot result is obtained are randomly determined by lottery or the like. The final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443 stores the valid lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined by the above processing is the final stop line provided in the RAM 444. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. At this time, a process for storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed. In the following description, the address information of the stop result determined by the various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 444.

  Also, in the jackpot effect setting process, the variable display mode of the jackpot symbol is determined (variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) is performed). As already described, when a jackpot result is obtained, the result is notified through a reach display or the like. In the variable display mode determination process for reach display, the variable display pattern table for reach display stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443 is acquired, and the variable display time of the variable start command received this time and the game in the type command An effect pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. Further, a process for storing the address information of the determined variation display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed. It should be noted that also in the variable display mode determination process described below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is acquired from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 443, and the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is determined. Then, the address information of the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444.

  If the game result is a game result that is not a jackpot result and a reach occurs, an effect setting process for reaching (reaching reach) corresponding to a miss result is executed. In this effect setting process, the outline of the effect and the symbol combination to be finally stopped are determined. About the former, since it is the same as that of the process in the case of a jackpot result, description is used. Since this process corresponds to a missed reach, the final stop symbol is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not obtained. That is, the final stop result in which the combination of the reach and reach symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the type of outreach symbol combination and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, the same symbol combination is not formed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 that is the same as the symbol forming the reach line is set to the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at the stop position shifted before or after. Thereafter, a process of storing information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area is executed.

  When neither the jackpot result nor the reach result corresponding to the reach display is satisfied, that is, when the result is a complete loss result, the outline of the effect for complete loss and the symbol combination to be finally stopped are determined. Since this processing corresponds to complete losing, the stop symbol is determined such that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not formed.

  After executing the determination process of step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1108, and a process of outputting a command including stop result information and effect pattern information to the display control apparatus 410 as a stop result command and a pattern command is executed. Based on these various commands, the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 performs display control of the symbol display device 253 in order to execute an effect in the current game round.

  After the process of step S1108 is executed, in the subsequent step S1109, a process for starting an effect for game times is executed, and then the process for starting variation is terminated. Specifically, drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the effect pattern determined in step S1105, and an effect for game times is started.

  Here, based on FIG. 29, supplementary explanation will be given on the variation display mode of symbols displayed on the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) in the normal effect mode. FIG. 30A is a schematic diagram showing the types of variation display modes, and FIG. 30B is a schematic diagram showing an overview of each variation display mode. In FIG. 30B, for convenience of explanation, a background image, hold information, and the like displayed on the display screen 253a are omitted.

(Variation display mode in normal performance mode)
As shown in FIG. 30 (a), the symbol variation display mode executed on the display screen 253a is largely divided into five, that is, complete detachment, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. Separated. About each of these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and the outline of the variable display mode for each game time is grasped based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main controller 162. It is possible.

  Specifically, “1 sec to 17 sec” is set for the fluctuation display time that is completely out of place (difference is set according to the number of holds), “18 sec” is set for the fluctuation display time for normal reach A, and the fluctuation display time for normal reach B Is about “20 sec or 22 sec” longer than the normal reach A fluctuation display time, and the super reach A fluctuation display time is “22 sec or 24 sec” longer than the normal reach B fluctuation display time. The display time is “24 sec or 26 sec” which is the same as or longer than the fluctuation display time of Super Reach A, and the fluctuation display time of Super Reach C is “26 sec or 28 sec” which is longer than the fluctuation display time of other Super Reach B. It has become. For example, when the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is “22 sec”, the notification / production control device 140 recognizes that the normal reach B or super reach A should be executed. Which reach display is to be selected.

  In the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, it is easy to select Super Reach C> Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach B> Normal Reach A. It is configured to be easily selected in the order of disengagement> normal reach A> normal reach B> super reach A> super reach B> super reach C. In other words, the winning expectation degree for jackpot is set higher as the variable display time becomes longer.

  Here, the variation display mode of the normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. When the normal reach A or B is selected, first, the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol sequences that are stopped is started, and then the symbol variable display is terminated in the upper symbol column Z1 (stop) In addition, in the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol variation display is terminated (stopped display). In the state where the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed in this way, the main symbols having the same numbers attached to any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 13A) are stopped and displayed. A reach line is formed. Then, reach display (reach change display) is performed by performing change display of the middle symbol row Z2 under the situation where the reach line is formed. After reaching the reach display, the variable display is terminated by stopping and displaying the middle symbol row Z2. Then, the fact that the symbol that is the same as the symbol that constitutes the reach display stops on the reach line is informed that the jackpot has been won, and the other symbols on the reach line stop to win the jackpot It will be notified that it is not. In this way, the symbol combination that has been finally stopped is maintained as it is for a predetermined fixed display time (final stop time). In other words, the current game time continues until the fixed display time elapses, and the transition to the next game time is permitted when the fixed display time elapses.

  In this embodiment, the difference in the fluctuation display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is ensured by setting the difference in the fluctuation display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed. The method of setting the difference between them is arbitrary. For example, by setting a difference in the time from when the variable display is started to when the reach line is formed, the difference in the variable display time can be secured.

  Next, the variation display mode of super reach A, B, C will be described based on the above-described variation display mode of normal reach A, B. As shown in FIGS. 30 (b2) to 30 (b4), the super reach A, B, and C form the above-described reach line through the same process as the normal reach A and B. And after forming a reach line, it is the structure which performs a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image together with the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, after a reach line is formed in Super Reach A, a character imitating a fairy is displayed at the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME). After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed at the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME). In Super Reach C, the reach line is formed, A character imitating a girl is displayed at the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

(Pseudo continuous fluctuation display)
In the normal performance mode in the present embodiment, there is a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of shifting to reach display in both game times corresponding to reach display and game times not corresponding to reach display. May be executed. Hereinafter, the flow of the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31A illustrates a game flow when the suggestion effect is not executed, and FIG. 31B illustrates a game flow when the suggestion effect is executed. 31A and 31B, illustration of a background image, hold information, and the like displayed on the display screen 253a is omitted as in FIG. 30B.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (a), at the game turn start timing, the variable display of each symbol sequence that has been stopped on the display screen 253a until then is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, the variable display speed of the symbol decreases, and each symbol row is stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row. If the current game time does not correspond to the suggestion effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the current game result is finally stopped and displayed on the active line, and the game result is clearly indicated to the player. In the example shown in FIG. 31 (a), since the game result is a completely missed result, the symbol combination corresponding to the completely missed is displayed as a final stop on the active line.

  FIG. 31B illustrates the game times corresponding to the suggestion effect and the reach display. At the start timing of the game times, the variable display of each symbol sequence that has been stopped on the display screen 253a until then is started. Thereafter, the variable display speed of the symbol is reduced, and each symbol row is stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row. When the lower symbol sequence stops, do not form a reach line with the symbols in the upper symbol sequence, that is, the symbols that can form a reach line with the upper symbol that is stopped in the lower symbol sequence are shifted from the upper symbol sequence. Stop at the position. After that, when the middle symbol sequence is stopped and all the symbol sequences are stopped (temporary stop display, pause display), the symbol combination corresponding to the above suggestion (revariable symbol combination, or , A temporary stop symbol combination) is formed.

  After that, all the symbol sequences that have been temporarily stopped change with a specific sound effect and an effect such as a flash. That is, it looks as if one game round has ended, and in practice, the temporary stop → revariation is performed under the situation where the game round is continued. In other words, before the final stop display, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-variation is temporarily stopped display → re-variable display is the suggestive effect in the present embodiment, and in the following description, the display is referred to as “pseudo continuous variation display”. Is also referred to.

  The pseudo continuous variation display may be executed continuously (repeatedly) a plurality of times during one game. During the pseudo continuous variation display, even if all the symbol sequences are stopped, the variation display of the symbols continues for the operation port display portions UD and LD of the main display unit 87 corresponding to the current game time. Is done.

  After the variable display is resumed, the final stop display (determined display) timing is reached, so that the symbol combination corresponding to the current game result is stopped and displayed on the active line (final stop display), and the game result is displayed as the player. Explicitly specified. In the example shown in FIG. 31B, since the game result is a jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed (final stop display) on the active line.

  As described above, the pseudo continuous variation display in the present embodiment occurs not only in the game times corresponding to the reach display but also in the game times corresponding to the complete miss result. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result or the like does not stop, leaving the room to lead to the jackpot, the degree of attention to the stopped symbol combination stops the lower symbol row and the middle symbol row Inconvenience such as a drop at a time can be prevented.

  As for the table that determines whether or not pseudo continuous variation display is possible, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result show pseudo continuous variation display compared to the game times corresponding to the reach failure result and the game times corresponding to the complete loss result. The game times corresponding to the out-of-reach result are configured so that pseudo continuous variation display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to the out-of-reach result.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 32, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the flow in the case where the pseudo continuous variation display is repeated during one game. FIG. 32 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 32 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the effect and the jackpot expectation. In FIG. 32 (a), for ease of comparison, ta1 to ta2 illustrate non-pseudo continuous variation display non-compliant game times, and ta3 to ta9 indicate pseudo continuous variation display compatible game times. Illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), at the timing of ta1 when the game turn that does not support pseudo continuous variation display is started, the variation display of the pattern is started on the operation port display portion of the main display unit 87, and accordingly, The symbol variation display is started on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. At the timing of ta2 when a predetermined variation display time has elapsed since the start of the display of the pattern and the variation of the symbol, the pattern that has been variably displayed on the display unit for the operation port becomes a pattern corresponding to the current game result. Are stopped and displayed so that each symbol that has been variably displayed on the display screen 253a becomes a symbol combination corresponding to the current game result. That is, the fluctuation start / end timing is synchronized (matched) between the working port display unit and the display screen 253a.

  At the timing ta3 when the game time corresponding to the pseudo continuous variation display is started, the variation display of the pattern is started on the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87, and the symbol is displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 accordingly. Fluctuation display has been started. The re-variable symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a at the timing of ta4 when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the variation display at the timing of ta3.

  At the timing of ta5 when the temporary stop time has elapsed from the timing of ta4, the variable display of each symbol sequence that has been temporarily stopped is resumed. At this time, it is suggested that there is a possibility of shifting to reach display by adding a white effect along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a. During this time, the display of the variation of the pattern is continued on the working port display section of the main display unit 87, and the variation display of the pattern on the display screen 253a and the display of the variation of the pattern on the display section for the working port are asynchronous.

  The re-variable symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed again on the active line of the display screen 253a at the timing of ta6 when a predetermined period has passed after the variable display is resumed. At the timing of ta7 when the temporary stop time has elapsed from the timing of ta6, the variable display of each symbol sequence that has been temporarily stopped is resumed. At this time, the color of the white effect displayed on the display screen 253a is changed from white to blue. Although details will be described later, it is suggested that the possibility of shifting to reach display is increased by repeating the pseudo continuous variation display (the effect color changes (steps up)). During this time, the variation display of the pattern is continued on the working port display unit, and the variation display of the pattern on the display screen 253a and the variation display of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port are asynchronous.

  At the timing of ta8 after the timing of ta7 at which the variable display of the symbol is resumed, that is, the timing of transition to the reach display, the upper symbol row and the lower symbol are stopped and only the middle symbol row continues to be changed. It becomes a state. In the example shown in FIG. 32A, the current game result corresponds to the outlier result. For this reason, after shifting to the reach display, in detail at the timing of ta9 when the variable display time has elapsed from the timing of ta3, the picture corresponding to the disengagement result is stopped and displayed on the display unit for the working port, and the display screen 253a is disconnected. The symbol combination corresponding to the result is finally stopped and displayed. Then, it moves to the next game time at the timing of ta10 when the fixed display time has passed.

  In the above-described example, the case where the pseudo continuous variation display is repeated twice during one game is illustrated, but the number of the pseudo continuous variation display repeated during one game is limited to a certain range (in the present embodiment). 1-6 times) is set. For the table that determines the number of pseudo continuous variation displays, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, the number of pseudo continuous variation displays set as compared to the game times corresponding to the reach failure result and the game times corresponding to the complete failure result The game times corresponding to out-of-reach results tend to increase the number of pseudo continuous variation displays set compared to the game times corresponding to complete-out results. . As the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation displays increases, the degree of expectation for a big win increases, so it is assumed that a player who expects a big win expects that a lot of pseudo continuous fluctuation displays will continue. In the present embodiment, the number of consecutive pseudo continuous variation displays is shown with the first variation display executed after the first temporary stop.

  In the present embodiment, the effect color of the display screen 253a changes each time the pseudo continuous variation display continues, and the expectation level for shifting to reach display is suggested. Even if the player misses a part of the pseudo-continuous display, it is possible to check the degree of expectation to shift from the effect color to the reach display.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the effect displayed during pseudo-continuous display is configured to change in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow every time the number of continuous pseudo-variable displays increases. The degree of expectation that shifts to reach display in the order of white <blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow, in other words, the expectation that is a jackpot result is set higher. Among these colors, the transition to super reach is confirmed for green to rainbow (4 to 6 continuous display of pseudo continuous fluctuation display), and the jackpot is determined especially for rainbow (6 continuous display of pseudo continuous fluctuation display). To do.

  In such a configuration, it is assumed that the player expects a pseudo-continuous display to occur during the game, and that if a pseudo-continuous variation display occurs, it will continue. By diversifying effects other than reach display in the game times executed in the normal effect mode, the degree of attention to the game is improved.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process of FIG. 28, if a negative determination is made in step S1102 of the variation start process, that is, if the normal gaming state is compatible with the high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, the effect determination process for the high frequency support mode is executed. After the effect determination process is executed in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108, a stop result command and a pattern command are set based on the determination contents, and after the game round effect start process is executed in step S1109, the actual change The start process ends.

  In the effect determination process in step S1107, if the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result (that is, a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result), a jackpot effect setting process is executed. In the jackpot presentation setting process, the final stop result of the jackpot symbol is determined (final stop result determination process is performed). In the final stop result determination process, the combination of the same specific symbol (the main symbol with an odd number attached) or the combination of the non-specific symbols (the main symbol with an even number) is applied to the active line when it is a probabilistic jackpot result. The stop result displayed for final stop is determined as the stop result of this game. In addition, when the result is a normal jackpot result, the stop result in which the combination of the same non-specific symbols (the main symbol with an even number) is finally stopped and displayed on the active line is determined as the stop result of this game round. .

  Also, in the jackpot effect setting process, the variable display mode of the jackpot symbol is determined (variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) is performed). As already described, when a jackpot result is obtained, the result is notified through a reach display or the like. In the variable display mode determination process for reach display, the variable display pattern table for reach display stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443 is acquired, and the variable display time of the variable start command received this time and the game in the type command A reach display effect pattern corresponding to the result is determined. Further, a process for storing the address information of the determined variation display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

  If the game result corresponds to a missed reach, an effect setting process for generating a reach corresponding to the missed result is executed. In this effect setting process, the outline of the effect and the symbol combination to be finally stopped are determined. About the former, since it is the same as that of the process in the case of a jackpot result, description is used. Since this process corresponds to a missed reach, a stop symbol is determined so as not to have a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the detachment symbols on the effective line is established is determined as the current stop result. In this determination, the stop result on the active line is determined so that the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 that is the same as the symbol forming the reach line is finally stopped at a stop position that is shifted before or after the reach line. Thereafter, a process of storing information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area is executed.

  When neither the jackpot result nor the reach result corresponding to the reach display is satisfied, that is, when the result is a complete loss result, the outline of the effect for complete loss and the symbol combination to be finally stopped are determined. Since this processing corresponds to complete losing, the stop symbol is determined such that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not formed.

  As already described, during the high frequency support mode, many of the game balls launched to the right route are guided to the lower operation port 83b by the electric accessory 91. In the high-frequency support mode, the variation display time in the game times corresponding to the complete losing result is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode (see FIGS. 24B and 24C). In this way, the sharpness of the game is enhanced by changing the progress speed of the game.

  During the above-described normal effect mode, almost the entire area of the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is set as the symbol variable display area ME. On the other hand, during the production mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode (short-time production mode), as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 33A, the upper right area (reduced display area) of the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 In (SE), the symbol is displayed in a reduced size, and the symbol variation display / stop display is performed in the upper right area. A girl character CP1 is displayed in an area (the center portion of the display screen 253a) that is vacated by the reduced display of the symbols, and this character CP1 performs a predetermined action (motion) as the game progresses. In this way, the display mode is greatly changed from the low frequency support mode to differentiate between the normal performance mode in the low frequency support mode and the time reduction effect mode in the high frequency support mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33 (b) and FIG. 34, the flow of effects in the high frequency support mode will be described. FIG. 33B is a timing chart showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the display effect. Note that FIG. 33 (b) illustrates a case where a game turn corresponding to the outage result is started at each timing of tb1, tb3, tb5, and tb7.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33B, at the timing of tb1 in the high frequency support mode, the change display of the symbols stopped and displayed in the reduced display area SE of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) is started. Yes. The girl character CP1 displayed in the lower right part (initial position) of the display screen 253a starts moving across the display screen 253a from the right side to the left side in accordance with the start of the variation display of the symbol ( (See FIG. 34 (a1)). In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the girl character CP1 shifts to the reach display after catching the fairy character CP2, but the girl character CP1 searches for the fairy character CP2 during the change display of the symbol. The moving image is displayed.

  At the timing of tb2, the symbol combination corresponding to the detachment result is finally stopped (determined display) in the reduced display area SE. The character CP1 returns to the initial position (lower right portion of the display screen 253a) between the timing tb2 and the timing tb3 when the fixed display time has elapsed.

  A series of actions of the character CP1 displayed between timings tb1 and tb2 are stored in the character ROM 476 of the display control device 410 as effect data. Both the timings tb3 to tb4 and the timings tb5 to tb6 are game times that are completely out of play, and the same effect (search effect) as the timing of tb1 to tb2 is repeated using the effect data. It will be.

  At the timing of tb7 after the timing of tb6, the game times corresponding to outlier reach are started. On the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, the symbol variation display in the reduced display area SE and the moving image display of the character in the variation display area ME are started at the timing tb6. At the timing of tb8 when a predetermined time (for example, the same time as the variable display time shown in the timing of tb1 to tb2) has elapsed from the timing of tb7, a branch effect (capture) Production) is started.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the fairy character CP2 is displayed on the display screen, and in the branching effect, the chasing between the girl character CP1 and the fairy character CP2 is performed on the display screen 253a. Will be displayed. Whether or not the display shifts to reach display is determined depending on whether or not the girl character CP1 can catch the fairy character CP2 through the chasing. In the game times corresponding to the reach display, a display (successful display) is made in which the girl character CP1 catches the fairy character CP2 in the branch effect, and in the game times not compatible with the reach display, the girl character CP1 is displayed in the branch effect. Is displayed (failure display) to miss the character CP2.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33B, the success display is made at the timing of tb9 and the display shifts to the reach display. At the timing tb9, a stage is displayed at the center of the display screen 253a, and a scoreboard is displayed above the stage. Then, the girl character CP1 that has been waiting (stopped) at the corner of the display screen 253a moves toward the stage, and a singing effect is performed to sing a song after reaching the stage (for example, FIG. 34 (b)). )reference).

  When the singing effect is finished, the numbers that are variably displayed on the scoreboard are stopped and displayed, and the result of this game round is notified by the stopped and displayed numbers (scores). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), when the current game time corresponds to the jackpot result, “100 points” is displayed on the scoreboard and the change display of the middle symbol row is displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the game times this time correspond to the result of losing, “0 points” is displayed on the scoreboard, and the middle symbol sequence for which the variable display has been continued is stopped. The symbol combination corresponding to is finally stopped and displayed. Thus, the timing at which the symbol is stopped and displayed through the reach effect is synchronized with the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the working port display portion of the main display unit 87 ends.

  In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, 5 sec may be set as the variable display time in a part of the game times corresponding to complete losing (see FIG. 24). The sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time (1 sec) matches the execution time (6 sec) of the branch effect in the game times corresponding to the reach display. In the game times corresponding to complete losing, after the failure display is executed in the branch effect, the game times are ended without shifting to the reach display.

  As described above, the high-frequency support mode is broadly divided into those that shift after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot result and those that shift after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot result. Regarding the latter, in particular, when the number of games in the high frequency support mode reaches a preset end reference number, the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. The short time effect mode described above will also end with the transition to the low frequency support mode. At the time of this transition, an effect (an end suggestion effect) corresponding to the end of the short-time effect mode is executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (a2), in the game times related to the end of the short-time effect mode, the display screen 253a is darkened during the variable display to the fixed display. Then, at the end of the fixed display, darkening is canceled and the reduced display of the symbol is canceled, and the display is switched to the display corresponding to the normal performance mode. The end suggestion effect can be generated even in a game time other than the game times related to the end of the time-saving effect mode. In this case, although the display screen 253a is darkened during the variable display to the fixed display, the display of the short-time effect mode is continued after the dark turn is canceled with the completion of the fixed display (FIG. 34 (a2)). (See (a1)).

  During the short-time effect mode, an effect (notice effect) that suggests the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 has a predetermined probability before the game times related to the hold information are started. It is configured to be executed in. An effect corresponding to the hold information that has not yet been selected for the lottery is executed at a timing prior to the game times related to the hold information, so that the player holds the game times that are currently in progress. A game that confirms or predicts the result when the hold information that becomes the lottery target later becomes the lottery target as well as the game that confirms the lottery result of the information according to the contents of the above production, diversification of the game Is planned. Thereby, the attention degree to a game can be raised.

  In the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, in order to enable such a notice effect, information such as whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result before the game times related to the stored hold information is started. The configuration is specified in advance. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 36, various processes for the notice effect performed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, specifically, the suspension executed as part of the information acquisition process (see FIG. 19). A supplementary explanation will be given for the confirmation process for notice and the pending command setting process.

(Confirmation process for hold notice)
As shown in FIG. 35, in the confirmation process for holding notice, in step S1301, the operation holding storage number N and the common holding number CRN stored in the holding number storage area of the holding ball storage area 432 are read and the holding is performed. The number information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. Thereafter, in steps S1302 to S1306, it is confirmed whether or not the winning information is included in the hold information acquired by the current winning. Specifically, first, in step S1302, the information for jackpot determination among the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the operation ports 83a and 83b, that is, the value of the acquired hit random number counter C1. To figure out.

  In a succeeding step S1303, it is determined whether or not the low probability mode is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. In the case of the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1304, and the determination table (FIG. 15 (a)) for the low probability mode and the jackpot determination information (value of the hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 are referred to. Then, it is specified whether the information is included in the information group corresponding to the big win. In the case of the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1305, where the high probability mode success / failure table (FIG. 15B) and the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1302 (value of the hit random number counter C1) To determine whether the information is included in the information set as a big win.

  After executing each process of step S1304 or step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306. When the jackpot determination information (value of the hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 corresponds to the jackpot winning, an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, and the process proceeds to step S1307. After the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S1307, the confirmation process for this reservation notice is finished as it is.

  In the process of step S1307, the information for determining the jackpot type out of the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning, that is, the value of the acquired hit type counter C2 is ascertained, and the distribution table is referred to. The jackpot type is determined. The information stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S1407 includes information related to the jackpot type.

  When the jackpot determination information (value of the hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 does not correspond to the jackpot winning, a negative determination is made in step S1306, and the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, outreach reach determination information, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 among the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the operation ports 83a and 83b, is obtained.

  In the subsequent step S1309, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 403 is referred to, and the reach grasped in step S1308 is determined. It is specified whether the information for determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as the reach winning.

  After executing the process of step S1309, the process proceeds to step S1310, and it is determined whether or not the reach determination information (value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1308 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, in step S1311, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, and then this confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

(Hold command setting process)
Next, the hold command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. In the setting process of the hold command, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. It is determined whether or not the information is identified as corresponding to the jackpot winning. If jackpot information is stored, the process advances to step S1402 to set a jackpot correspondence pending command. Note that the setting of the above commands and various commands described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 404. Note that the jackpot support pending command includes information on the jackpot type.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if it is determined that no jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, the process proceeds to step S1403, and whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. It is determined whether or not the information for reach determination is identified as corresponding to the occurrence of reach in the immediately preceding confirmation process for holding notice (FIG. 35). If the reach occurrence information is stored, a release reach hold command is set in step S1404, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete release hold command is set in step S1405.

  When the hold command is set in steps S1402, S1404, and S1405, the change display time is determined with reference to the value of the change type counter CS and the like, and information related to the change display time is stored in the hold command. . In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to in the same manner as the variable display time setting process shown in step S708. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140, and the notification / production control device 140 can grasp the variation display mode of the symbol based on the hold command. Note that, as described above, in the case of complete detachment, the variable display time can be changed according to the number of the hold information stored when starting the game times related to the hold information. Therefore, when setting a completely out of correspondence hold command, a temporary setting of the variable display time is performed.

  In the notification / production control device 140, it is determined whether or not to perform the notification effect based on the hold command received from the main control device 162 and the lottery table for the notification effect. The lottery table for the notice effect is set so as to increase in the order of the hold command corresponding to the complete miss result <the hold command corresponding to the reach miss result <the hold command corresponding to the jackpot result. As for the types of effects in the notice effect, six patterns of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow are provided as in the above-described pseudo continuous variation display. It is set to increase in the order of <yellow <green <red <rainbow. Of the effect colors in the notice effect, green to rainbow are compatible with reach display, and the rainbow corresponds to jackpot, similar to the pseudo continuous fluctuation display, and it is determined that reach display will occur. If it is not, the effect will not be more than green, or if it is not confirmed that it will be a big hit, the effect will not become a rainbow.

  When a hold command is received in a situation where no effect is occurring, it is determined whether or not the effect is generated at the game times before the game times related to the hold command. When the hold command is received under the situation, the effect color is determined to be ranked up at the game times before the game times related to the hold command. The effect once generated is erased with the above-described mode transition effect or reach effect as a trigger.

  In the pseudo continuous variation display, the effect display is completed during one game time, whereas in the notice effect, the effect display is continued so as to extend over a plurality of game times. It is different in point. In the pseudo continuous variation display, the number of pseudo continuous variations and the effect color are the same, but in the notice effect, the number of game times digested during the notice effect and the effect color do not necessarily match. . That is, in the notice effect, the effect color may not change (step up) even if the game times progress.

  Here, the outline of the notice effect will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. In FIG. 37 (a), there are two pieces of hold information reserved after the game game being executed, and the notice effect is started with the second hold information (hold information corresponding to the jackpot result) among them. This is an example.

  When the symbol combination corresponding to the detachment result is finally stopped and displayed (determined display), the notice effect is started with the second hold information (winning result) as a trigger. In the notice effect, a white effect along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a is added to the display screen 253a. This effect will be carried over to the next game.

  When the game combination is shifted to the next game time and the symbol combination corresponding to the detachment result is finally stopped (determined display), the effect color is changed from white to blue. This suggests that the possibility of reach display (big hit) has increased. This effect will be carried over to the next game number (that is, the corresponding game number triggered by the hold notice). The corresponding game times correspond to reach display, and the effect being displayed is deleted when the game times (reach display) end.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display time corresponding to reach display in the high frequency support mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time corresponding to reach display in the low frequency support mode, thereby speeding up the game progress. It is illustrated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), in the low frequency support mode, the variable display time corresponding to reach display is set to 18 sec to 28 sec, whereas in the high frequency support mode. The change display time corresponding to reach display is standardized to 17 sec. The reach display executed in the high frequency support mode is configured to be the super reach D described above.

  Here, in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the effect mode becomes the special effect mode, so that the main effect including the reach display becomes the same as the time-short effect mode. This makes it possible to give the player an impression as if the short-time effect mode has occurred during the normal gaming state compatible with the low frequency support mode, and in the normal gaming state compatible with the low frequency support mode. Suppressing the monotony of games.

  However, since the special effect mode is an effect mode that is executed only during the low frequency support mode, even when the same effect (super reach D) as the special effect mode is executed, the variable display time is adjusted accordingly. Is not shortened. That is, even if the main controller 162 sets the variable display time corresponding to any of the normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, the notification / effect control device 140 Is based on the fact that the effect mode is the special effect mode, and the super reach D is executed instead of the various reach. In this case, there will be a difference in the variable display time between the super reach D executed in the high frequency support mode and the super reach D executed in the special performance mode. One of the features is that by making good use of the portion where the difference occurs, an effort is made to bring the production flow in the special production mode closer to the production flow in the short-time production mode. Hereinafter, a configuration related to the special effect mode will be described.

  First, returning to the description of the variation start process of FIG. 28, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1104 of the variation start process, that is, if the special effect mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444, step The process proceeds to S1106. In step S1106, the effect determination process for the special effect mode is executed. After performing the effect determination process in step S1106, a stop result command and a pattern command are set based on the determined content in step S1108, and after executing the game round effect start process in step S1109, this variation start The process ends. Here, the effect determination process for the special effect mode will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 38 and 39.

(Production determination process for special performance mode)
As shown in FIG. 38 (a), in the effect determination process for the special effect mode, it is determined in step S1501 whether or not the current game time corresponds to a jackpot result (that is, a promising jackpot result or a normal jackpot result). judge. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to a missed reach. When an affirmative determination is made in either step S1501 or step S1502, reach special effect setting processing is executed in step S1503. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in both step S1501 and step S1502, that is, if the current game time corresponds to complete miss, a special effect setting process for complete miss is executed in step S1504.

(Special production setting process for reach)
As shown in FIG. 38 (b), in the special effect setting process for reach, first, in step S1511, the time from the start of change to the reach display is specified. As already described, the reach display is unified to the super reach D in the special effect mode. That is, the super reach D is executed even when any of 18 sec to 28 sec is designated as the variable display time from the main controller 162 (see FIG. 37B). In this embodiment, the reach display execution time in Super Reach D is defined to be 10 seconds, and the display shifts to reach display by subtracting the Super Reach D execution time from the variable display time in this game. The required time to do is specified.

  In subsequent step S1512, a value obtained by dividing the time required to shift to reach display by the reference time, that is, the number of divisions obtained by dividing the section before reach display in the game times by the reference time (in the following description, each divided section Are also referred to as “parts”). Here, the reference time will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls launched on the right route enter the lower operation port 83b with the support of the electric accessory 91. For this reason, in a situation where game balls are continuously being fired to the right route during the high-frequency support mode, the number of suspensions related to the lower operation port 83b changes from “2” to “4”, and most games For each time, the variable display time is 1 sec and the final display time is 1 sec. That is, the time required for one game round is 2 sec in many cases.

  The character ROM 476 of the notification / effect control device 140 stores an effect (a moving image in which the girl character CP1 travels the display screen 253a) with a playback time of 2 seconds. In the time-shortage effect mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode, The production is configured to be repeatedly reproduced. This time is the reference time. In the following description, the above-described moving image and the symbol variable display to stop display (including both temporary stop display and finalized display) performed in parallel with the moving image are referred to as “first special effect”. At the time of temporary stop display in the special effect mode, a symbol combination corresponding to the complete disconnection is displayed so as to resemble the time reduction effect mode. Incidentally, in the special effect mode, the first special effect or the like is used to make it appear that the game times are proceeding in a pseudo manner one after another. Also called “display”.

  For example, when the variable display time is 18 sec, the time required for reach display is 8 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is “4”. When the variable display time is 20 sec, the time required for reach display is 10 sec. When this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is “5”. When the variable display time is 22 sec, the time required for reach display is 12 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is “6”. When the variable display time is 24 sec, the time required for reach display is 14 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is “7”. When the variable display time is 26 sec, the time until reach display is 16 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is “8”. When the variable display time is 28 sec, the time required for reach display is 18 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is “9”.

  In subsequent step S1513, an upper limit (continuous number of times) at which the first special effect can be continuously executed in the section before shifting to reach display is referred to the continuous number setting table stored in ROM 443 and a random number for lottery. To set. Specifically, a first continuous number and a second continuous number that allow the first special effect to be continuously executed are set.

  The first consecutive number and the second consecutive number in the present embodiment indicate the number of times the first special effect is continuously executed without the second special effect and the third special effect described later. For example, when the first special effect is executed once, the first consecutive number = “1”, and when the first special effect is executed twice in succession, the second consecutive number = “2”. . On the other hand, the continuous number of variable display until the end of the first special effect as “0” and the end of the second special effect or the third special effect is referred to as “continuous fluctuation number” and is distinguished from the continuous number of times. For example, when the first special effect is executed once, the number of continuous fluctuations = “0”, and when the first special effect is executed twice, the number of continuous fluctuations = “1”, the first special effect. When the second special effect is executed after two consecutive executions, the number of continuous fluctuations = “2”. Incidentally, in each figure such as FIGS. 40 and 41 referred to in the following description, the number of continuous fluctuations in each part is represented by a number.

  When this game time corresponds to a miss reach, the consecutive number setting table for miss reach stored in the ROM 443 is referred to. In the consecutive number setting table for outreach, “1” to “5” are provided as the first continuous number, and any one of these five candidates is set as the first continuous number in this game number.

  When this game time corresponds to the hit reach, the hit reach continuous number setting table stored in the ROM 443 is referred to. In the consecutive reach setting table for winning reach, “1” to “6” are provided as the first consecutive number, and any one of these six candidates is set as the first consecutive number in this game number.

  In the continuous number setting table for outreach reach, the selection rate increases in the order of “5” <“4” <“3”, “2”, “1”, and in the continuous number setting table for hit reach, “1” <“ The selection probability increases in the order of “2” <“3” <“6” <“5” <“4”. For this reason, the expectation degree which becomes a big hit will increase, so that the frequency | count of continuous increases. The number of consecutive times “6” corresponds to the jackpot, and when the number of consecutive times becomes “6”, that is, when the number of continuous fluctuations including the second special effect becomes “6”, It becomes a state that it is clearly stated that the jackpot is confirmed. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the number of continuous fluctuations is “6”, an effect to be described later becomes a rainbow color.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first special effect group may be divided back and forth by interposing the second special effect in the section before reach display. About the 2nd continuous number of times, the upper limit of the continuous number of times of the 1st special production in the first half part divided in that way is prescribed, for example. For the second consecutive number of times, “3” is set with the following exceptions.

  As a condition when a value other than “3” is set as the second number of consecutive times, there is a case where it corresponds to a big hit and the first number of consecutive times is “5” or more. In such a case, the second consecutive number may be increased so as to be the same as the first consecutive number. When the second consecutive number is increased from “3” to “4” to “6”, an event may occur in which the continuous number does not develop into super reach even though the number reaches the “4”, for example. Functions as a definitive effect that will soon be a big hit.

  In the RAM 444 of the notification / production control device 140, the number of first special effects (continuous result) executed before the start of the game time (for example, at the immediately previous game time), more specifically, other effects are sandwiched therebetween. A continuous counter is provided for storing the number of times the first special effect is repeated (continuous result). The continuous counter is incremented by “1” every time the first special effect is executed, and “0” is obtained when an effect other than the first special effect (for example, a second special effect or a third special effect described later) is executed. It is configured to be cleared. For example, when the first special effect is continued over a plurality of game times executed before the game time, that is, when the first special effect is repeated without any other special effects in between. Even so, the continuous result counter is added each time the first special effect is produced. In the subsequent step S1514, the continuous result is specified with reference to the continuous counter.

  Then, after performing the reach effect pattern setting process (reach effect pattern setting process) in step S1515, the special effect setting process is terminated. Here, the reach effect pattern setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Reach production pattern setting process)
In the reach effect pattern setting process, first, in step S1601, a section (a divided part) before reach display in the game times is divided into two sections. Specifically, when the super reach D is executed in the special effect mode, a branch effect (hereinafter also referred to as a second special effect) is passed in the same manner as the time reduction effect mode. The execution time of the second special effect (6 sec in the present embodiment) is an integral multiple of the part (reference time). Therefore, a plurality of parts in front of the super reach D are used for the second special effect, and the section before the reach display is the first half section for the first special effect (first section) and the latter half section for the branch effect (second Section). Incidentally, the remaining time obtained by subtracting the execution time of the second special effect from the section before the reach display is a time during which the first special effect can be executed in the first half section.

  After division into the first half section / second half section in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether the number of parts constituting the first half section is equal to or greater than the upper limit (first continuous number) of the continuous number set in step S1513. Although details will be described later, if the first special effect is applied to all the parts constituting the first half section and the number of consecutive times exceeds the first number of consecutive times, a sense of incongruity tends to occur in the effect flow. Therefore, if there is a possibility that at least the first consecutive number of times will be exceeded, the second special effect is assigned to any of the above parts in order to avoid the first special effect exceeding the first consecutive number of times. In this way, the production pattern is determined. For example, the first special effect group is divided back and forth so that the second special effect is interposed between a plurality of consecutive first special effects.

  If a positive determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, with reference to the value of the continuous counter, it is determined whether or not the continuous result from the previous game round is “0”, that is, whether or not the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect. judge.

  If the value of the continuous counter is “0”, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) in this game time is not considered in step S1604 without considering the flow from the previous game time. decide. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification / production control device 140 stores the first special pattern table in accordance with various conditions such as the result of winning lottery, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, and the like in step S1604. In the processing, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from these first special pattern tables, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected first special pattern table. The first special pattern table is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to the jackpot result and a table group corresponding to the outlier result.

  In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, there is a difference in the selection rate so that it is easier to select more effect patterns than the effect patterns in which the number of first special effects before the reach display shift is small. When interposing a second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided before and after by the second special effect is the first after the second special effect. The number of consecutive special effects tends to increase.

  For example, if the game number corresponding to the jackpot result, the first consecutive number is “6”, the second consecutive number is “2”, and the number of parts in the first half section is “6”, the first special pattern table group The one corresponding to those conditions is selected from. In the first special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions, effect patterns A1, B1, C1, and D1 are provided (see FIG. 40A).

  The production pattern A1 is configured to apply the first special production to all the first to sixth parts, and the intervention of the second special production between the consecutive first special productions is avoided. The When the game times are executed in this effect pattern A1, as shown in Example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 41, the first special effect is repeated six times before moving to the second section. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and all the symbol sequences fluctuate in the above-described reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33A), and the predetermined variation display time (1 sec) is reached. Accordingly, the flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the detachment result is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed six times, and the number of continuous fluctuations including the second special effect executed in the second section is six times. And super reach D will be performed through the 2nd special production.

  The production pattern B1 is configured such that the first special production is applied to the first part, the second special production is applied to the second to fourth parts, and the first special production is applied to the fifth to sixth parts. The special effect group is divided into front and rear by the second special effect. In this effect pattern B1, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 41, the second special effect is executed after the first special effect is executed at the beginning of the game times, and the process proceeds to the second section. The first special effect is repeated twice. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and all the symbol sequences fluctuate in the above-described reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33A), and the predetermined variation display time (1 sec) is reached. Accordingly, the number of continuous fluctuations in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the detachment result is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed twice immediately before the second section, and then includes the second special effect executed in the second section. Times. And super reach D will be performed through the 2nd special production.

  The production pattern C1 is configured to apply the first special production to the first part to the second part, the second special production to the third part to the fifth part, and the first special production to the sixth part. The production group is divided back and forth by the second special production. The effect pattern D1 is configured to apply the second special effect to the first part to the third part and the first special effect to the fourth part to the sixth part, and after the second special effect is executed at the beginning. The first special effect continues.

  In the first special pattern table corresponding to the hit results detailed above, the number of times the first special effect is continued before the reach display increases in the order of effect pattern C1 <effect pattern B1 <effect pattern D1 <effect pattern A1. The selection rate of each effect pattern is also higher in the order of effect pattern C1 <effect pattern B1 <effect pattern D1 <effect pattern A1.

  In the table group corresponding to the result of losing, there is a difference in the selection rate so that more effect patterns can be selected more easily than effect patterns with a small number of consecutive first special effects before the reach display shift. When interposing a second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided before and after by the second special effect is the first after the second special effect. The number of consecutive special effects tends to decrease.

  In this way, one game time is divided into a plurality of game times in a pseudo manner so that the game times appear to be progressing at a short pitch, thereby giving the player an impression that the player has entered the short-time effect mode. Can be given.

  Returning to the description of step S1603 in FIG. 39, if a negative determination is made in step S1603, if the previous game round has ended with the first special effect (when the value of the continuous counter is not 0), In step S1605, an effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined in consideration of the flow from the previous game time. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification / production control device 140 stores the second special pattern table in accordance with various conditions such as the winning lottery result, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, and the continuous result from the previous game round. In the processing of step S1604, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from these second special pattern tables, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected second special pattern table.

  Similar to the first special effect pattern table, the second special effect pattern table is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to the jackpot result and a table group corresponding to the loss result. In any table group, the intervention location of the second special effect is defined so that the number of consecutive times does not exceed the upper limit (first number of consecutive times) when the previous game times are taken into account.

  In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, there is a difference in the selection rate so that it is easier to select more effect patterns than the effect patterns in which the number of first special effects before the reach display shift is small. When interposing a second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided before and after by the second special effect is the first after the second special effect. The number of consecutive special effects tends to increase.

  For example, the game number corresponding to the jackpot result, the first consecutive number is “6”, the second consecutive number is “6”, the number of parts in the first half section is “6”, and the consecutive number from the previous gaming number is “1”. In this case, the second special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is referred to (see FIG. 40B). Production patterns A2, B2, and C2 are provided in the second special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions.

  The production pattern A2 is configured to apply the second special production to the first to third parts and the first special production to the fourth to sixth parts, respectively, and the second special production was executed at the beginning. Later, the first special effect continues. When the game times are executed in this effect pattern A2, as shown in Example 1 of the schematic diagram of FIG. 42, by executing the second special effect at the beginning of the first section, Will be interrupted before reaching the upper limit. In the first section, the first special effect is repeated three times while the second special effect ends and the process proceeds to the second section. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and all the symbol sequences fluctuate in the above-described reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33A), and the predetermined variation display time (1 sec) is reached. Accordingly, the flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the detachment result is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed three times, and the number of consecutive times including the second special effect executed in the second section is three times. And super reach D will be performed through the 2nd special production.

  The production pattern B2 is configured such that the first special production is applied to the first part, the second special production is applied to the second to fourth parts, and the first special production is applied to the fifth to sixth parts. The special effect group is divided into front and rear by the second special effect. When the effect pattern B2 is executed as the effect pattern, as shown in Example 2 of the schematic diagram of FIG. 42, the second special effect is performed after the first special effect is executed once at the beginning of the first section. Executed. By this second special effect, the continuation from the previous game round is interrupted before reaching the upper limit. In the first section, the first special effect is repeated twice while the second special effect ends and the process proceeds to the second section. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and all the symbol sequences fluctuate in the above-described reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33A), and the predetermined variation display time (1 sec) is reached. Accordingly, the flow of temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the detachment result is executed twice, and the number of consecutive times including the second special effect executed in the second section is two. And super reach D will be performed through the 2nd special production.

  The production pattern C2 is configured such that the first special production is applied to the first part to the second part, the second special production is applied to the third to fifth parts, and the first special production is applied to the sixth part. The production group is divided back and forth by the second special production. At the beginning of the first section, the first special effect is executed twice, and then the second special effect is executed. For this reason, the number of consecutive games from the previous game is 4 times in the second special effect. Originally, four consecutive times correspond to the development to super reach D, but in the effect pattern C2, the first special effect is executed again after the second special effect and does not develop to super reach D. This effect pattern C2 is one of the contradictory effects described above.

  In the second special pattern table corresponding to the winning results detailed above, the number of times the first special effect is continued before the reach display increases in the order of effect pattern B1 <effect pattern A1, and the selection rate of each effect pattern Is also higher in the order of production pattern B1 <production pattern A1. On the other hand, the second special pattern table corresponding to the miss result is configured such that the number of times the first special effect is continued before the reach display is smaller than that of the second special pattern table corresponding to the hit result. The selection rate for selecting the effect pattern C2 is lower than the selection rates of the effect pattern A2 and the effect pattern B2.

  In the table group corresponding to the result of losing, there is a difference in the selection rate so that more effect patterns can be selected more easily than effect patterns with a small number of consecutive first special effects before the reach display shift. When interposing a second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided before and after by the second special effect is the first after the second special effect. The number of consecutive special effects tends to decrease.

  In this way, one game time is divided into a plurality of game times in a pseudo manner so that the game times appear to be progressing at a short pitch, thereby giving the player an impression that the player has entered the short-time effect mode. Can be given.

  Returning to the description of step S1602 in FIG. 39, if a negative determination is made in step S1602, that is, if the number of parts in the first half section is below the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, referring to the value of the continuous counter, it is determined whether or not the continuous result from the previous game round is 0, that is, whether or not the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect. To do.

  If the value of the continuous counter is 0, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined in step S1607 without considering the flow from the previous game time. . Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification / production control device 140 stores the third special pattern table according to various conditions such as the result of winning lottery, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, and the like in step S1607. In the process, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from these third special pattern tables, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected third special pattern table. The third special pattern table is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to the jackpot result and a table group corresponding to the outlier result.

  In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, there is a difference in the selection rate so that it is easier to select more effect patterns than the effect patterns in which the number of first special effects before the reach display shift is small. When interposing a second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided before and after by the second special effect is the first after the second special effect. The number of consecutive special effects tends to increase.

  In the table group corresponding to the result of losing, there is a difference in the selection rate so that it is easier to select a lesser effect pattern than an effect pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before the reach display shift. When interposing a second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided before and after by the second special effect is the first after the second special effect. The number of consecutive special effects tends to decrease.

  The basic structure of the third special pattern table is the same as that of the first special pattern table, but there are many effect patterns with respect to the effect pattern having a small number of consecutive first special effects executed before the reach display shift. The bias in selectivity is large. In the game times in which the third special pattern table is referenced compared to the game times in which the first special pattern table is referenced, the number of parts in the first half section tends to be small. As described above, by increasing the selection ratio bias, it is possible to earn the number of continuous times and the number of continuous fluctuations before reach display even when the number of parts in the first half section is small.

  Returning to the description of step S1606, if a negative determination is made in step S1606, that is, if the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect (when the continuous counter is not 0), step S1608 is performed. In consideration of the flow from the previous game round, the production pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special production and the second special production) is determined. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification / production control device 140 stores a fourth special pattern table according to various conditions such as the result of winning lottery, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, and the like in step S1607. In the process, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from these fourth special pattern tables, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected fourth special pattern table. The fourth special pattern table is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to the jackpot result and a table group corresponding to the outlier result.

  In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, there is a difference in the selection rate so that it is easier to select more effect patterns than the effect patterns in which the number of first special effects before the reach display shift is small. When interposing a second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided before and after by the second special effect is the first after the second special effect. The number of consecutive special effects tends to increase.

  In the table group corresponding to the result of losing, there is a difference in the selection rate so that more effect patterns can be selected more easily than effect patterns with a small number of consecutive first special effects before the reach display shift. When interposing a second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided before and after by the second special effect is the first after the second special effect. The number of consecutive special effects tends to decrease.

  The basic structure of the fourth special pattern table is the same as that of the second special pattern table, but there are many effect patterns for the effect patterns with a small number of consecutive first special effects executed before the reach display shift. The bias in selectivity is large. In the game times in which the fourth special pattern table is referenced compared to the game times in which the second special pattern table is referenced, the number of parts in the first half section tends to be small. As described above, by increasing the selection ratio bias, the number of consecutive times before reach display can be earned even when the number of parts in the first half section is small.

  As described in detail above, one game time is divided into a plurality of game times in a pseudo manner so that the game time appears to be progressing at a short pitch, as if the player was in the short-time effect mode. Can give an impression.

  After executing the processing of steps S1604 to S1608, the process proceeds to step S1609 to execute effect setting processing. In the special effect mode in the present embodiment, the effect is displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a under the situation where the first special effect is repeated. There is a case. For this effect, there are 6 colors in total, white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, similar to the effect displayed during pseudo continuous fluctuation display in the normal performance mode, and white <blue <yellow <green < It is set so that the degree of expectation that is a big hit in the order of red <rainbow is higher.

  In the effect setting process in step S1609, the final effect color and its step-up pattern are determined based on the current game result and the effect pattern determined in steps S1604 to S1608. In the case of the jackpot result, it is easy to select the final effect in the order of white <blue <yellow <rainbow <green <red. The effect set in step S1609 is canceled at the end of reach display in this game round.

  Incidentally, the effect displayed in the special effect mode may be displayed even in the game times corresponding to the complete losing result. The effects that have been displayed at the game times corresponding to the complete losing result are basically canceled when the second special effect, the third special effect, or the reach display ends, and the first special effect is It is configured not to be released under repeated conditions. For this reason, the effect display may continue across game times. In consideration of such circumstances, in the special effect mode, the number of times of the first special effect and the number of step-ups of the effect do not necessarily coincide with each other. May decrease.

  In the case of an out-of-reach result, it is easy to select red <green <yellow <blue <white, and the rainbow is out of the selection candidates. As will be described in detail later, if the result is a completely out-of-range result, the final effect is easily selected in the order of yellow <blue <white, and green, red, and rainbow are out of the selection candidates. In the normal performance mode, rainbow colors correspond to jackpots, and green, red, and rainbow colors correspond to super reach. By removing some colors from the selection candidates according to the game result, the display of the effect in the normal effect mode and the display of the effect in the special effect mode are given.

  Returning to the description of the effect determination process for the special effect mode shown in FIG. 38 (a), when a negative determination is made in both step S1501 and step S1502, that is, the game times corresponding to the complete outage result, The process proceeds to step S1504. After executing the special effect setting process for complete removal in step S1504, the effect determination process for the special effect mode is ended. Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43, the complete off special effect setting processing will be described.

(Special effect setting process for complete removal)
In the complete off special effect setting process, first, in step S1701, the number of divisions (number of parts) obtained by dividing the variation display time of the game times by the reference time (2 sec) that is the execution time of the first special effect is calculated. . When a remainder is generated by division, this is moved up to obtain the number of divisions. This is a device that uses a part of the fixed display time (2 sec) after the variable display time as the execution time of the first special effect or the like. In view of such circumstances, it can be said that the calculation in step S1701 divides the entire section, which is the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time (2 sec), by the reference time. In this case, the remainder is rounded down.

  For example, when the variable display time is 17 sec, the number of divisions obtained by dividing the variable display time by the reference time is eight remainders 1, and is rounded up to “9”. That is, when the variable display time is 17 sec, the number of parts is “9”. When the variable display time is 15 sec, the number of divisions obtained by dividing the variable display time by the reference time is 7 remainders equal to 1, and is rounded up to “8”. That is, when the variable display time is 15 seconds, the number of parts is “8”. When the variable display time is 3 seconds, the number of divisions obtained by dividing the variable display time by the reference time is one more than one, and is rounded up to “2”. That is, when the variable display time is 3 seconds, the number of parts is “2”. When the variable display time is 1 sec, the number of divisions obtained by dividing the variable display time by the reference time becomes a remainder of 0 and becomes “1” by rounding up the fraction. That is, when the variable display time is 1 sec, the number of parts is “1”.

  In subsequent step S1702, the number of consecutive times (upper limit) at which the first special effect can be continuously executed in this game time is referred to the continuous number setting table for complete losing stored in the ROM 443 and the random number for lottery. Set.

  In the continuous number setting table for complete losing, “1” to “3” are provided as the continuous number, and any one of these three candidates is set as the upper limit in this game number. The continuous number setting table for complete deviation is configured so that the selection probability increases in the order of “1” <“2” <“3”. Even if the upper limit is set higher due to the balance with the variable display time and the influence of the continuous result in the previous game number, the actual number of continuous times is less than that. Therefore, in the game times corresponding to complete losing, the selection probability is defined so that the upper limit tends to increase, thereby suppressing frequent occurrence of the second special effect or the like. .

  In the subsequent step S1703, the number of first special effects executed before the start of the main game (for example, immediately before the game) with reference to the continuous counter provided in the RAM 444 of the notification / effect controller 140. (Consecutive result), specifically, the number of times (the continuous result) the first special effect is repeated without interposing another effect.

  After executing the process of step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704, and it is determined whether or not the game time is the final game time in the special effect mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special effect mode end flag is stored in various flag storage areas 466 of RAM 444. The special effect mode end flag is a flag stored in step S1209 of the special effect mode processing (see FIG. 29).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, it is determined whether subsequent hold information is stored. If a negative determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, it is determined whether or not the effect is displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. If a negative determination is made in step S1704 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1707, and after the first setting process is executed in step S1707, the effect pattern setting process for complete removal is performed. finish. In other words, if it is not the last game round in the continuous production mode and the subsequent holding information exists, or if there is no subsequent holding information but no effect has occurred, the first setting process is executed. Will be. Here, the first setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

(First setting process)
In the first setting process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the total number of parts is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the continuous number. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, processing proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is 0, that is, whether or not it is necessary to consider the flow of the previous game round.

  If it is determined in step S1802 that the value of the continuous counter is “0”, that is, if the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, an effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined with reference to the fifth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The fifth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the total number of parts. In the processing of step S1803, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from these fifth special pattern tables, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected fifth special pattern table.

  For example, when the upper limit of the number of consecutive times is “3” and the total number of parts is “9”, the one corresponding to those conditions is selected from each fifth special pattern table. In the fifth special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions, effect patterns A5, B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, and G5 are provided (see FIG. 45A).

  The production pattern A5 is configured such that the first special production is applied to the first part to the third part, the second special production is applied to the fourth to sixth parts, and the first special production is applied to the seventh to ninth parts. The first special effect group is divided back and forth by the second special effect. In this effect pattern A5, as shown in Example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 46, the second special effect is executed after the first special effect is executed three times at the beginning of the game times. The first special effect is repeated three times before the game times are completed. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and all the symbol sequences fluctuate in the above-described reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33A), and a predetermined fluctuation display time (1 sec) is obtained. The flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the result of detachment is displayed as a temporary stop as it elapses is executed three times each with the second special effect in between. That is, due to the intervening second special effect, the number of continuous fluctuations in the first half is “3” including the second special effect, and the number of continuous fluctuations in the second half is “2”. The game round ends when the number of continuous fluctuations is “2”.

  The production pattern B5 includes the first special production for the first to second parts, the second special production for the third to fifth parts, the first special production for the sixth part, and the second special production for the seventh to ninth parts. Each of the special effects is applied. In this effect pattern B5, after the first special effect is executed twice at the beginning of the game times, the second special effect is executed, and the second special effect is executed again with one first special effect interposed therebetween. The

  The production pattern C5 includes the first special production for the first part, the second special production for the second to fourth parts, the first special production for the fifth to sixth parts, and the second special production for the seventh to ninth parts. Each of the special effects is applied. In this effect pattern C5, after the first special effect is executed once at the beginning of the game times, the second special effect is executed, and the second special effect is executed again with the two first special effects in between. The

  The production pattern D5 includes the first special production for the first part, the second special production for the second to fourth parts, the first special production for the fifth part, the second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, The first special effect is applied to each of the 9 parts. In the effect pattern D5, the first special effect and the second special effect are executed alternately.

  The effect pattern E5 is configured to apply the second special effect to the first part to the third part, the first special effect to the fourth part to the sixth part, and the second special effect to the seventh part to the ninth part, respectively. ing. In the effect pattern E5, after the second special effect is executed at the beginning of the game times, the first special effect is executed three times, and then the second special effect is executed again.

  The production pattern F5 includes the second special production for the first to third parts, the first special production for the fourth to fifth parts, the second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and the first special for the ninth part. Each of the special effects is applied. In the effect pattern F5, after the second special effect is executed at the beginning of the game times, the first special effect is executed twice, and then the first special effect is executed once again through the second special effect. The

  The production pattern G5 is the second special production for the first part to the third part, the first special production for the fourth part, the second special production for the fifth part to the seventh part, and the first for the eighth part to the ninth part. Each of the special effects is applied. In this effect pattern G5, the first special effect is executed once after the second special effect is executed at the beginning of the game times, and then the first special effect is executed twice again through the second special effect. The

  In this way, by combining the first special effect and the second special effect so that one game time can be divided into a plurality of game times in a pseudo manner, the player feels as if the player is in the short-time effect mode. Can be given.

  In the fifth special pattern table described in detail above, the number of executions (part occupancy rate) of the second special effect in the effect pattern A5 is smaller than that in the effect patterns B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, and G5. The selection ratio of each effect pattern is also set so that the effect patterns B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, G5 <the effect pattern A5. Thereby, it is suppressed that the appearance frequency of a 2nd special production becomes high too much.

  Further, in the fifth special pattern table, the game times end at either the first special effect or the second special effect, but the number of continuous fluctuations when the game times end at the second special effect. Is set to “3” at the maximum, and the number of continuous fluctuations when the game round is ended in the first special effect is set to “2” at the maximum. The reason for providing an effect pattern in which the game time is ended in the first special effect is to devise an opportunity to take over the number of continuous fluctuations to the next game time, assuming that the next game time is reserved. It is. However, in such a configuration, it may be necessary to secure time for ending the continuous variation in the next game round. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a third special effect having a shorter time than the second special effect is provided in addition to the second special effect as a special effect that triggers the end of continuous variation. Yes. For the third special effect, the required time is set so that the third special effect can be executed even when the variation display time of the next game time is the shortest (for example, 1 sec). Thereby, even if it is the structure which takes over a continuous fluctuation | variation to the next game time, the opportunity to complete | finish the said continuous fluctuation | variation at the next game time is ensured.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 39, if a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the previous game round has ended in the first special effect (when the continuous result is not “0”), the process proceeds to step S1804. move on. In step S1804, an effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined with reference to the sixth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The sixth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the total number of parts, and the continuous result from the previous game number. In the process of step S1804, the sixth special pattern table corresponding to the current condition is selected, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected sixth special pattern table.

  For example, if the upper limit is “3”, the total number of parts is “9”, and the continuous result from the previous game round is “1”, the one corresponding to those conditions is selected from each sixth special pattern table. select. The sixth special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is provided with effect patterns A6, B6, C6, D6, and E6 (see FIG. 45B).

  The production pattern A6 is the first special production for the first part, the second special production for the second to fourth parts, the first special production for the fifth to sixth parts, and the second special production for the seventh to ninth parts. Each of the special effects is applied. In this effect pattern A6, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 46, the second special effect is executed after the first special effect is executed once at the beginning of the game times, and the second special effect ends. After that, the second special effect is executed again with two first special effects. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and all the symbol sequences fluctuate in the above-described reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33A), and a predetermined fluctuation display time (1 sec) is obtained. The flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the result of detachment is displayed as a temporary stop as it elapses is executed a total of three times, counting from the previous game times, and again twice with the second special effect. In the first half of this game time, the number of continuous fluctuations inherited from the previous game time is suppressed to “3”. In the second half of the game time, the game time ends with the second special effect, and the number of continuous fluctuations is also suppressed to “2”.

  The production pattern B6 includes a first special production for the first part, a second special production for the second to fourth parts, a first special production for the fifth part, a second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, The first special effect is applied to each of the 9 parts, and the first special effect group is divided forward and backward by the second special effect. In the effect pattern B6, the first special effect and the second special effect are executed alternately.

  The effect pattern C6 is configured to apply the second special effect to the first part to the third part, the first special effect to the fourth part to the sixth part, and the second special effect to the seventh part to the ninth part, respectively. ing.

  The production pattern D6 is the second special production in the first to third parts, the first special production in the fourth to fifth parts, the second special production in the sixth to eighth parts, and the first in the ninth part. Each of the special effects is applied.

  The production pattern E6 includes the second special production for the first part to the third part, the first special production for the fourth part, the second special production for the fifth part to the seventh part, and the first special part for the eighth part to the ninth part. Each of the special effects is applied.

  In this way, by combining the first special effect and the second special effect so that one game time can be divided into a plurality of game times in a pseudo manner, the player feels as if the player is in the short-time effect mode. Can be given.

  In the sixth special pattern table described in detail above, the selection rate of the effect pattern is different depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the sixth special pattern table is already in the case where the interval time from the previous game time coincides with the fixed display time (2 sec) in the low frequency support mode, that is, at the end of the previous game time. The sixth special pattern table X that is referred to when the hold information related to the game times is acquired, and the interval time from the previous game time exceeds the fixed display time (2 sec) in the low frequency support mode That is, it is roughly divided into the sixth special pattern table Y that is referred to when the hold information related to the game times is not acquired at the end of the previous game times.

  In the sixth special pattern table X, the selection rate of the effect patterns A6 and B6 in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is higher than the selection rate of the effect patterns C6, D6 and E6 in which the second special effect is executed at the beginning. It is set to be high. The sixth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the effect patterns A6 and B6 is lower than that of the sixth special pattern table X, and the preferential treatment of the effect patterns A6 and B6 with respect to other effect patterns is eliminated. Has been.

  The first special effect is likely to occur at the beginning of the subsequent game times when the previous game time and the subsequent game times are continuously executed so as to minimize the interval time. (2) The player is prevented from giving an impression that the occurrence of special effects indicates the start of game times, making the break between game times less noticeable.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 44 again, if a negative determination is made in step S1801, that is, if the total number of parts of the current game number is below the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is “0”. If a positive determination is made in step S1805, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, an effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined with reference to the seventh special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The seventh special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the total number of parts. In the process of step S1806, one corresponding to the current condition is selected from these seventh special pattern tables, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected seventh special pattern table.

  The basic configuration of the seventh special pattern table is the same as that of the fifth special pattern table, and the selection rate is such that more effect patterns can be selected more easily than effect patterns with a small number of consecutive first special effects. There is a difference. The bias of the selection rate is larger than that of the fifth special pattern table, and even when the total number of parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to earn an opportunity to execute the first special effect. .

  Returning to the description of step S1805, if a negative determination is made in step S1805, that is, if the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect (if the continuous counter is not 0), step S1807 is performed. In consideration of the flow from the previous game round, the production pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special production and the second special production) is determined. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification / production control device 140 stores the eighth special pattern table according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of continuous times, the total number of parts, and the continuous result from the previous game time. In the process of step S1807, one corresponding to the current condition is selected from these eighth special pattern tables, and an effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected eighth special pattern table.

  The basic configuration of the eighth special pattern table is the same as that of the sixth special pattern table, and the selection rate of the effect pattern is different depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the eighth special pattern table indicates that the interval time from the previous game time coincides with the fixed display time (2 sec) in the low-frequency support mode, that is, already at the end of the previous game time. The eighth special pattern table X that is referred to when the hold information relating to the game times has been acquired and the interval time from the previous game times exceeds the fixed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode That is, it is roughly divided into the eighth special pattern table Y that is referred to when the hold information relating to the game time is not acquired at the end of the previous game time.

  The eighth special pattern table X is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is higher than the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the second special effect is executed at the beginning. . Compared to the eighth special pattern table X, the eighth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the effect patterns A6 and B6 in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is lower. The preferential treatment for has been eliminated.

  The first special effect is likely to occur at the beginning of the subsequent game times when the previous game time and the subsequent game times are continuously executed so as to minimize the interval time. (2) The player is prevented from giving an impression that the occurrence of special effects indicates the start of game times, making the break between game times less noticeable.

  In the eighth special pattern table, a difference is provided in the selection rate so that more effect patterns can be selected more easily than effect patterns with a small number of consecutive first special effects as in the sixth special pattern. ing. However, this bias in the selection rate is larger than that in the sixth special pattern table, and even when the total number of parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to earn an opportunity to execute the first special effect. It has become.

  After the effect pattern is set in the processes in steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807, the effect setting process is executed in step S1808, and then the first setting process is terminated.

  As already described, in the special effect mode in the present embodiment, the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is arranged along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a under the situation where the first special effect is repeated. Effects may be displayed. For this effect, there are 6 colors in total, white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, similar to the effect displayed during pseudo continuous fluctuation display in the normal performance mode, and white <blue <yellow <green <Red> Expected to be a big hit in the order of rainbow.

  In the effect setting process in step S1808, whether or not to display the effect, the effect color, and its step-up pattern are determined based on the current game result and the effect patterns determined in steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807. In the special effect mode, the effect display set in the previous game times may be continued up to the main game time across the game times. Therefore, when the effect is inherited from the previous game round, it is determined whether or not to update the color of the effect to a higher one, and when the color is updated, a step-up pattern to that color is set. decide. Note that the step-up pattern also includes information on which part releases the effect and information on whether or not to take over the effect to a subsequent game round.

  Even if the effect display has not been taken over from the previous game round or if it has been taken over, if you want to cancel the effect on the way, decide whether or not to generate a new effect, and change the effect color and step up. Determine the pattern. Incidentally, the step-up timing of the effect is configured to be the timing when the re-variation of the temporarily stopped symbol is started.

  Returning to the description of the special effect setting process for complete losing in FIG. 43, if it is the last game time in the special effect mode, or if the effect is being generated even though the subsequent hold information is not reserved, step S1708 is performed. After proceeding to step 2 and executing the second setting process, the special effect setting process for complete removal is completed. Here, the second setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Second setting process)
In the second setting process, first, in step S1901, a third special effect is set for the final part. The third special effect is an effect corresponding to the end suggestion effect (see FIG. 34A) executed in the above-described short-time effect mode. Specifically, in the game times related to the end of the special effect mode, the display screen 253a is darkened during the variable display to the fixed display. Then, at the end of the fixed display, darkening is canceled and the reduced display of the symbol is canceled, and the display is switched to the display corresponding to the normal performance mode. The end suggestion effect can be generated even in a game time other than the game times related to the end of the time-saving effect mode. In this case, although the display screen 253a is darkened during the variable display to the fixed display, the display of the short-time effect mode is continued after the dark turn is canceled upon completion of the fixed display.

  For the third special effect, data whose execution time matches the reference time (data that is 2 sec) among the end suggestion effect data stored in the display control device 410 is used. In the subsequent processing, the production pattern is determined for the remaining parts.

  After executing the process of step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, it is determined whether the number of remaining parts excluding the final part is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of consecutive times. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, processing proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is “0”, that is, whether or not it is necessary to consider the flow of the previous game round.

  If it is determined in step S1903 that the value of the continuous counter is “0”, that is, if the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, an effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined with reference to the ninth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The ninth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the number of remaining parts. In the process of step S1904, one corresponding to the current condition is selected from these ninth special pattern tables, and an effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected ninth special pattern table.

  For example, if the upper limit of the number of consecutive times is “3” and the number of remaining parts is “8” (the total number of parts is “9”), the one corresponding to those conditions is selected from each ninth special pattern table To do. In the ninth special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions, effect patterns A9, B9, C9, D9, and E9 are provided (see FIG. 48A).

  The production pattern A9 includes the first special production for the first to third parts, the second special production for the fourth to sixth parts, the first special production for the seventh to eighth parts, and the first special production for the ninth part. Each of the three special effects is applied, and the first special effect group is divided forward and backward by the second special effects. The third special effect is executed at the last part of the game times, the game times are ended, and the special effect mode is also ended accordingly.

  The production pattern B9 is the first special production for the first to second parts, the second special production for the third to fifth parts, the first special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and the third special for the ninth part. Each of the special effects is applied. In the effect pattern B9, as shown in Example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49, after the first special effect is executed twice at the beginning of the game times, the second special effect is executed. Three times of the first special effect and one time of the third special effect are executed until the game time ends. Due to the intervening second special effect, the number of continuous fluctuations in the first half is “3” including the second special effect, and the number of continuous fluctuations in the second half is “3” including the third special effect. Then, the special effect mode ends with the game times.

  The production pattern C9 includes the first special production for the first part, the second special production for the second to fourth parts, the first special production for the fifth part, the second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, The third special effect is applied to each of the 9 parts.

  The production pattern D9 is the second special production for the first to third parts, the first special production for the fourth to fifth parts, the second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and the third special production for the ninth part. Each of the special effects is applied.

  The production pattern E9 is the second special production for the first to third parts, the first special production for the fourth part, the second special production for the fifth to seventh parts, the first special production for the eighth part, The third special effect is applied to each of the 9 parts.

  In the ninth special pattern table described in detail above, the number of executions (part occupation ratio) of the second special effect in the effect patterns A9, B9 is smaller than that in the effect patterns C9, D9, E9. Are also set so that the production patterns C9, D9, E9 <production patterns A9, B9. Thereby, it is suppressed that the appearance frequency of a 2nd special production becomes high too much.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 47, if a negative determination is made in step S1903, if the previous game round has ended in the first special effect (if the continuous result is not “0”), the process proceeds to step S1904. . In step S1904, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined with reference to the tenth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The tenth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the number of remaining parts, and the continuous result from the previous game number. In the processing of step S1904, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from the tenth special pattern table, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected tenth special pattern table.

  For example, if the upper limit is “3”, the number of remaining parts is “8” (the total number of parts is “9”), and the continuous result from the previous game round is “1”, The one corresponding to those conditions is selected from. Production patterns A10, B10, C10 are provided in the nineteenth special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions (see FIG. 48B).

  The production pattern A10 includes a first special production for the first part, a second special production for the second to fourth parts, a first special production for the fifth part, a second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, The third special effect is applied to each of the 9 parts.

  The production pattern B10 is the second special production for the first to third parts, the first special production for the fourth to fifth parts, the second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and the third special production for the ninth part. Each of the special effects is applied.

  The production pattern C10 includes the second special production for the first to third parts, the first special production for the fourth part, the second special production for the fifth to seventh parts, the first special production for the eighth part, The third special effect is applied to each of the 9 parts. In this effect pattern C10, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49, after the second special effect and the first special effect are executed alternately, the third special effect is executed and each second special effect intervened. Due to the production, the number of continuous fluctuations in the early stage is “2” including the second special production, and the number of continuous fluctuations in the middle is “1” including the second special production, and the number of continuous fluctuations in the final stage is third. It is “1” including special effects. Then, the special effect mode ends with the game times.

  In the tenth special pattern table described in detail above, similarly to the sixth special pattern table, the selection rate of the effect pattern is different depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the 10th special pattern table is already in the case where the interval time from the previous game time coincides with the fixed display time (2 sec) in the low frequency support mode, that is, at the end of the previous game time. When the tenth special pattern table X that is referred to when the hold information related to the game times is acquired and the interval time from the previous game time exceeds the fixed display time (2 sec) in the low frequency support mode That is, it is roughly divided into the tenth special pattern table Y that is referred to when the hold information related to the game times is not acquired at the end of the previous game times.

  In the tenth special pattern table X, the selection rate of the production pattern A10 in which the first special production is executed at the beginning is higher than the selection rates of the production patterns B10 and C10 in which the second special production is executed in the beginning. Is set. Compared to the tenth special pattern table X, the tenth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection ratio of the effect pattern A10 is lower.

  The first special effect is likely to occur at the beginning of the subsequent game times when the previous game time and the subsequent game times are continuously executed so as to minimize the interval time. (2) The player is prevented from giving an impression that the occurrence of special effects indicates the start of game times, making the break between game times less noticeable.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 47 again, if a negative determination is made in step S1902, that is, if the number of remaining parts of the current game number is below the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, an effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined with reference to the eleventh special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The eleventh special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the number of remaining parts. In the process of step S1907, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from these eleventh special pattern tables, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected eleventh special pattern table.

  The basic configuration of the eleventh special pattern table is the same as that of the ninth special pattern table, and the selection rate is such that a greater number of effect patterns can be selected more easily than an effect pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects. There is a difference. The bias of the selection rate is larger than that of the fifth special pattern table, and it is possible to earn an opportunity for the first special effect to be executed even when the number of remaining parts is below the upper limit. .

  Returning to the description of step S1906, if a negative determination is made in step S1906, that is, if the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect (when the continuous counter is not 0), step S1908 is performed. In consideration of the flow from the previous game round, the production pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special production and the second special production) is determined. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification / production control device 140 stores a twelfth special pattern table according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the number of remaining parts, and the continuous result from the previous game number. In the process of step S1908, one corresponding to the current condition is selected from these twelfth special pattern tables, and an effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected twelfth special pattern table.

  The basic configuration of the twelfth special pattern table is the same as that of the tenth special pattern table, and the selection rate of the effect pattern differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the twelfth special pattern table is already in the case where the interval time from the previous game time coincides with the fixed display time (2 sec) in the low frequency support mode, that is, at the end of the previous game time. When the twelfth special pattern table X that is referred to when the hold information related to the game times is acquired and the interval time from the previous game time exceeds the fixed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode That is, it is roughly divided into the twelfth special pattern table Y that is referred to when the hold information related to the game times is not acquired at the end of the previous game times.

  The twelfth special pattern table X is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is higher than the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the second special effect is executed at the beginning. . Compared to the twelfth special pattern table X, the twelfth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is lower.

  The first special effect is likely to occur at the beginning of the subsequent game times when the previous game time and the subsequent game times are continuously executed so as to minimize the interval time. 2 The same function as the 10th special pattern table in that it suppresses giving the player the impression that the occurrence of special effects indicates the start of game times and makes the breaks between game times less noticeable. Is granted.

  In the twelfth special pattern table, a difference is provided in the selection rate so that more effect patterns can be selected more easily than an effect pattern having a small number of consecutive first special effects as in the tenth special pattern. ing. However, the bias of the selection rate is larger than that of the tenth special pattern table, and even when the total number of parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to earn an opportunity to execute the first special effect. It has become.

  After the effect pattern is set in the processes of steps S1904, S1905, S1907, and S1908, the effect setting process is executed in step S1909, and then the second setting process ends.

  The effect setting process in step S1909 is the same as the effect setting process in step S1809, and whether or not the effect can be displayed based on the current game result and the effect patterns determined in steps S1904, S1905, S1907, and S1908. Determine the color and its step-up pattern. In the special effect mode, the effect display set in the previous game times may be continued up to the main game time across the game times. Therefore, when the effect is inherited from the previous game round, it is determined whether or not to update the color of the effect to a higher one, and when the color is updated, a step-up pattern to that color is set. decide. Note that the step-up pattern also includes information on which part the effect is released from.

  Even if the effect display has not been taken over from the previous game round or if it has been taken over, if you want to cancel the effect on the way, decide whether or not to generate a new effect, and change the effect color and step up. Determine the pattern. Note that the second setting process is to determine the effect pattern of the last game times in the special effect mode, and all the displayed effects are canceled by the end of the game times.

  According to the special effect mode described in detail above, an effect similar to the effect mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode (short time effect mode) can be generated during the low frequency support mode by dividing one game time into a plurality of times. It has become. In the short-time effect mode, for example, the lottery mode may be a high probability mode. That is, the player's attention is easier to focus than in the normal performance mode. Therefore, by making it appear as if the special effect mode has the same effect as the short-time effect mode, monotonization of the game in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode can be suitably suppressed. In view of the fact that games are often played in the normal gaming state compatible with the low-frequency support mode, as described above, diversifying the effects in the normal gaming state compatible with the low-frequency support mode improves the interest of the game. It is effective in planning.

  When the same effect as in the short-time effect mode is executed in the special effect mode, there is a possibility that the way of capturing the effect is greatly different depending on the skill level of the player and the knowledge possessed. For example, in the case of a player who is unfamiliar with the game, it is assumed that the special effect mode is the effect mode similar to the time-saving effect mode, and the above effects can be exhibited. In the case of a player who is familiar with the game, even if it looks the same, it is difficult to specify that the base game state is different between the special effect mode and the short-time effect mode. Not expected. In addition, when the information corresponding to the jackpot result is included in the stored hold information, it is easier to shift to the special effect mode compared to the case where the information corresponding to the jackpot result is not included. If it is configured that the success / failure information is added to the transition condition to the special performance mode, it is possible to suppress the difference between the expectation for the special performance mode and the expectation for the time-shortage production mode.

  On the other hand, in the case of a player having a certain degree of knowledge, there is a possibility that the pseudo continuous variation display generated in the normal performance mode and the continuous variation in the special performance mode are interpreted as the same. In the quasi-continuous variation display, the expectation level for jackpots increases dramatically as the number of continuations increases, so it is assumed that the game is played with the expectation that the quasi-continuous variation will continue. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 50, when the game times are divided into a plurality of parts and the first special effect is executed in all the parts, the behavior can be brought close to the short-time effect mode, The number of continuous fluctuations will increase greatly. In the pseudo continuous variation display, when the number of times becomes 4, super reach or more is decided, and when it becomes 6, the jackpot is decided. On the other hand, if the number of continuous fluctuations in the special performance mode exceeds those thresholds, the fact that the number of continuous fluctuations does not lead to a big win will increase the player's dissatisfaction and reduce the game motivation There is concern about becoming. In other words, to achieve the same effect as the effect mode for the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode within the restraint of the effect mode for the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the misunderstanding of the player is suppressed. Ingenuity is required.

  In this regard, in the special effect mode shown in the present embodiment, the second special effect is intervened in the first special effect group to indicate the end of the continuous variation (the continuous variation is discontinued). Is suppressed.

  In the notification / production control device 140 that acquired the variable display time information from the main control device 162, the variable display time is divided by the reference time. Then, an effect pattern is determined by assigning the first special effect to the third special effect to each of the divided parts. For the first special effect, the same effect data as the effect executed in the short-time effect mode is used, and the data amount related to the game effect is reduced.

  In addition, the variable display time can be set variously, but there are many conditions for determining the effect by calculating the number of parts by the above calculation and switching the table to be referenced based on the result. In addition, it is preferable because sharing of data can be promoted. For example, even if the variable display times are different, the same table can be referenced if the various conditions for the number of parts are the same. Therefore, this is advantageous compared to the case where a table is provided for each variable display time.

  Here, the execution time of the second special effect and the third special effect is an integral multiple of the execution time of the first special effect. For this reason, it can suppress that the excess and deficiency of time arises by allocation of a 1st special effect-a 3rd special effect. This is a preferable configuration for facilitating the flow of performance.

  Note that the execution time of the third special effect is the same as the execution time of the first special effect (equal magnification). Specifically, it is 2 sec, which is shorter than the sum of the shortest variation display time of 1 sec and the fixed display time of 2 sec in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, if the variation display time for at least one part can be secured, it is possible to stop the continuation of the first special effect. In any game times during the special effect mode, The end of the special effect mode can be suitably executed. The third special effect is also useful when the degree of freedom of the effect pattern is improved by cooperation with the previous game time and the later game time.

  In the short-time effect mode, if the game ball is continuously fired toward the right route, each game time proceeds in 2 seconds. Therefore, in the first special effect, both the variable display time and the temporary stop display time are set to 1 sec, and the execution time of the first special effect is set to one game time in the time-saving effect mode. In this case, in the situation where the first special effect is repeated, the appearance is the same as the progress in the special effect mode, and the mimic effect can be suitably exhibited. However, in the game times in the low frequency support mode, the fixed display time is 2 seconds, which is longer than the fixed display time (1 sec) in the game times in the high frequency support mode. For this reason, in the special effect mode, a sense of incongruity may occur in the effect flow due to the influence of the interval between game times. Such a sense of incongruity is assumed to be prominent when game times corresponding to complete losing are repeated.

  In this regard, the present embodiment is configured such that a part of the special effect that is set last overlaps the finalized display in the game times corresponding to complete losing. This makes it possible to make the interval appear shorter than it actually is. Specifically, the variable display times in the game times corresponding to complete losing are all odd numbers, and are not divisible by the even reference time. The value obtained by subtracting the remainder from the reference time is shorter than the final display time. Thereby, a base for using a part of the fixed display time as a time for special effects is constructed. In this way, by devising the length of the variable display time, the length of the reference time, and the length of the fixed display time, it is possible to solve the above-described problems without greatly changing the existing configuration. .

  In the special effect mode, the second special effect intervenes to prevent the continuous number from becoming excessive. This effect also occurs in the short-time effect mode. As shown in FIGS. 24 (b) and 24 (c), in the game times corresponding to complete detachment, the number of stored pieces of hold information corresponds to the second special effect (branch effect). The variable display time may be set. Thereby, it is suppressed that the 2nd special production is conspicuous in special production mode.

  In the short-time effect mode, the game progress may be monotonous, although the game speed is increased. Therefore, the hold information relating to the subsequent game times is specified in advance, and the announcement effect (effect display) is executed based on the result, thereby suppressing the monotonous effect. Here, in the special effect mode, the effect display is executed according to the effect pattern in the game times. Thus, by performing the display effect similar to the time-saving effect mode, the divergence between the time-saving effect mode and the special effect mode is suppressed.

  In the special effect mode, the number of times the first special effect to the third special effect (unit display) are executed is stored, and the number of times the special effect (unit display) is executed is at least the minimum end reference number of the high frequency support mode. The special performance mode is maintained until the same number of times. Thereby, the divergence between the special effect mode and the time-saving effect mode is suppressed.

  Each special pattern table has a configuration in which the number of executions of the first special effect is likely to increase. Since the occurrence rate of the branch effect is low even in the short-time effect mode, the occurrence of such inconvenience is suppressed by suppressing the occurrence of the second special effect.

  Increasing the degree of freedom in setting the first special effect by coordinating with the previous game time and the subsequent game time ensures as many execution opportunities as possible for the first special effect in a configuration in which an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive times. Preferred above.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the time required for reach display when the super reach D is executed in the special effect mode is constant. In the present embodiment, a plurality of reach display times (for example, long / short) are provided, and any one of these required times is selected each time in the game times when the super reach D is executed. It is one of the features. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the special effect mode in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

  The ROM 443 of the notification / production control device 140 stores a required time selection table for reach display that defines the required time for reach display in the game times corresponding to the super reach D. In the MPU 442 of the notification / production control device 140, when the change start command and the type command are received from the main control device 162, the game time to be executed this time is based on the change display time information, the success / failure information, etc. included in these commands Whether or not it corresponds to the super reach D is specified, and when the current game time corresponds to the super reach D, the required time (long / short) is determined with reference to the required time selection table. The difference between the required times is set to be an integral multiple of the reference time described above.

  If the time required for reach display is different, the remaining time length excluding the time required for reach display is different even if the time is the same variable display time. That is, the calculation result in the case of calculating the number of parts in the reach special effect setting process (step S1512) shown in FIG. 38B depends on the time required for reach display.

  As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 51, when “Long” is selected as the time required for reach display (see Example 2), the number of parts before reach display is five, whereas reach display is performed. When “short” is selected as the required time (see Example 1), the number of parts before reach display is six. That is, in the “short” that is easily selected when the jackpot result is obtained, the number of parts that can execute the first special effect is one more than the “long”. Therefore, it is easier to secure the execution opportunity of the first special effect when “short” is selected than when “long” is selected as the required time.

  When the reach display is executed in the normal performance mode, the time required for the reach display is set to be longer for the variable display mode in which the expected degree of jackpot is set higher. On the other hand, in the required time selection table for reach display described above, the time required for reach display is set to be shorter for the game times corresponding to the jackpot result than for the game times corresponding to the missed result. It is easy to configure. That is, in the game times in which the super reach D is executed, in the case of the jackpot result, the number of parts until the display shifts to reach display is likely to be increased as compared with the disapproval result.

  In the special effect mode, the degree of freedom of allocation of the first special effect and the second special effect can be increased by earning the number of parts before shifting to reach display. As a result, it is easy to earn the number of continuous fluctuations until the display shifts to reach display, and the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by the effect in the special effect mode can be more suitably exhibited.

<Third Embodiment>
In the special effect mode shown in the second embodiment, the time required for reach display is determined based on the variable display time information and the success / failure information from the main control device 162. In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the determination of the required time is partly different from that of the second embodiment.

  Specifically, when determining the time required for reach display in the special effect mode of the present embodiment, in addition to the variable display time information and the success / failure information from the main control device 162, continuous results from the previous game times. And the upper limit in the game times is referred to. In other words, in order to determine the time required for reach display, a configuration in which the continuous result from the previous game round and the set upper limit are taken into account, that is, the reach display based on them after specifying the continuous result and setting the upper limit are completed. The required time is determined.

  More specifically, the reach display time selection table stored in the ROM 443 of the notification / production control device 140 includes the variable display time information, the success / failure information, the continuous results from the previous game times, and the upper limit for the game times. It is stored in association with various conditions. The time required for reach display is determined from among “short”, “middle”, and “long” by referring to the table corresponding to the current condition from among the required time selection tables. For “Short”, the part that can execute the first special effect is one more than “Middle”, and for “Middle”, the part that can execute the second special effect is 1 compared to “Long”. It is configured to increase one by one.

  For example, an event may occur in which it is difficult to earn the continuous variation number if the number of parts is halfway despite the situation where it is desired to earn the continuous variation number following the reach display in the game times. Specifically, if the required time is “middle” and the number of parts in the first section excluding the second special effect part (second section) before the reach display shift is “7”, By applying the first special effect to all the parts of the first section, the continuous variation number following the reach display becomes “7”, which exceeds “6” which is the upper limit of the continuous variation number. Although such inconvenience can be avoided by setting the second special effect in the first section, the number of continuous fluctuations following the reach display is extremely reduced. In the required time selection table for reach display according to the present embodiment, in such a case, the time required for reach display should be increased by one part, that is, the number of parts in the first section should be decreased by one. “Long” is easy to select. More specifically, the selection probability increases in the order of “middle” <“short” <“long”.

  With the configuration described in detail above, the number of continuous fluctuations in the game times corresponding to the hit Super Reach D is suppressed, and the number of continuous fluctuations is extremely increased in the game times corresponding to the outlier Super Reach D. This can be suppressed. Therefore, the technical idea shown in the second embodiment that the number of continuous fluctuations can be set in a mode suitable for the situation can be more suitably realized.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when determining the effect pattern in the special effect mode, the effect pattern in the previous game round (specifically, the above-described continuous result) is considered. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the effect pattern is determined in consideration of the effect pattern in the game times after the game times when the effect pattern is determined. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52 and the timing chart of FIG. 53, a configuration related to the determination of the effect pattern in the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the main configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus description of these common configurations is omitted.

  In the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, the setting process for cooperation is executed as part of the effect determination process for the special effect mode (specifically, the first setting process). The linkage setting process is a process that is executed when the current game time is a game time that is completely out of play and the subsequent hold information is already stored at the start of the game time, and the above-described step S1803 This process is executed before the determination process of S1804, S1806, and S1807.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the linkage setting process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the next game round corresponds to reach display. As already described, the hold command transmitted from the main control device 162 to the notification / production control device 140 includes variable display time information, success / failure information, etc., and the notification / production control device 140 includes these information. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the next game time corresponds to reach display. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, that is, if the next game round corresponds to complete losing, the setting process for cooperation is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, details of the effect pattern of the next game round are confirmed in step S2002. Specifically, the number of parts (the number of parts in the first section) until the display shifts to reach display in the next game round is calculated. In the subsequent step S2003, the number of parts constituting the first section of the next game round is a substantial upper limit (ie, “6” when corresponding to the jackpot result, and when corresponding to the outlier result). Is less than “5”). If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the linkage setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, whether or not cooperation between the game time and the next game time is determined is determined by lottery. If the next game round is not to be linked, a negative determination is made in step S2005, and the linkage setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of performing cooperation with the next game round, an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, and the process proceeds to step S2006.

  In step S2006, the upper limit of the continuous number of times over the game times is set. Thereafter, in step S2007, a special pattern table to be referred to in the game time and the next game time is selected, and the setting process for cooperation is ended. In the determination process in steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807, when a special pattern table is selected in step S2007, the effect pattern is determined with reference to the special pattern table, and the selection is not made. The effect pattern is determined with reference to the special pattern table selected in the same flow as in the first embodiment.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 53, it demonstrates about the production pattern at the time of cooperation generation | occurrence | production. At the timing of tc1 during the fixed display, a ball enters the upper working port 83a, and the number of stored hold information increases from “1” to “2”. When the game is started at the timing tc2, the display of the variation of the pattern on the display unit for the upper operation port of the main display unit 87 and the display of the variation of the pattern on the symbol display device 253 are started.

  The game times correspond to complete misses, and the next game times correspond to jackpots. For the next game round, the variable display time is 22 seconds, and the number of parts is “3” in the time (first section) excluding the reach display and the branch effect immediately before the reach display. For this reason, the number of times that the first specific effect can be executed in the first section of the next game round is “3”, that is, when the next game round is continuously changed, the reach display (branch effect) is included. The maximum number of continuous fluctuations is “3”. The next game round corresponds to the winning result, and the upper limit of the actual continuous fluctuation number is “6”. Therefore, the number of parts in the first section is insufficient to perform the continuous fluctuation for this upper limit. Yes.

  When the game round is started at the timing of tc2, whether or not to cooperate with the next game round is determined by lottery. In the example of FIG. 54, the case where the lottery is won is illustrated. In the game times started at the timing of tc2, the first special effect is executed once at the beginning, and the second special effect is executed at the subsequent timing of tc3. Thereafter, in the second half of the game times, the first special effect is continuously executed twice. The first special effect that is finally executed ends after the display of the symbols on the upper working port display unit and the symbols on the symbol display device 253 is started at timing tc5.

  When the next game round is started at the timing of tc6 immediately after the first special effect is finished, the display of the variation of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port and the display of the variation of the pattern on the symbol display device 253 are started again. At the beginning of the next game time, the first special effect is executed three times, and the continuous number of times of the first special effect is 5 times over the previous game time to the next game time. Then, when the second special effect as the branch effect is started at the timing of tc7, the number of continuous fluctuations including the second special effect becomes “5”, and the display shifts to reach display at the timing of tc8. The next game round corresponds to the jackpot result, and at the timing of tc9, the stop display (determined display) of the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result is started on the operation port display unit and the symbol display device 253 wins the jackpot Stop display (definite display) of the symbol combination corresponding to the result is started.

  As described above, when an effect pattern is determined in the previous game round, a configuration that takes into account the outline of the effect pattern of the next game round can be relaxed. If it is possible to earn the continuous variation number by the next game time (one game time) alone, the continuous variation number can be appropriately set according to the result of the success or failure.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode is performed by executing the same effect as the short time effect mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode in the special effect mode in the low frequency support mode. In this configuration, the game is prevented from becoming monotonous. As already described, in the high frequency support mode, the variable display time and the fixed display time are shortened compared to the low frequency support mode, and the game progress is speeded up. It is important to resemble the effect in the special effect mode and the effect in the short time effect mode when using the special effect mode to make it appear as if it suddenly shifts to the short time effect mode during the low frequency support mode. . Therefore, as shown in the first embodiment, in order to divert the video used during the special performance mode to the normal performance mode, it is possible to reduce the difference in appearance between the effects in the two performance modes. it makes sense.

  However, in the short-time effect mode and the special effect mode, due to the diversion of the effects, a slight discomfort may occur due to the diversion of the effects. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 54, the cause of this uncomfortable feeling will be supplementarily described. FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing the game flow. In FIG. 54, the time related to the symbol display is set to Ta for the display part for the operation port of the main display unit, and the time related to the symbol display for the display screen 253a (specifically, the variable display region ME and the reduced display region SE) of the symbol display device 253. Is distinguished as Tb.

  When the normal performance mode is set in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the picture stop display time (determined display time) Ta1 and the symbol display device 253 in the display part for the operation port of the main display unit 87 are displayed. The final stop display time (determined display time) Tb1 of the symbol on the display screen 253a (variable display region ME) coincides with the stop display start timing of the pattern on the working port display unit and the display screen 253a (variable display region ME). The final stop display start timing of the symbol in FIG. That is, the symbol stop display and the symbol stop display are synchronized.

  When the short-time effect mode is set in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the variation display time and the fixed display time of the pattern and the pattern in each game time are shortened compared with the low frequency support mode. However, as in the normal performance mode, the pattern stop display time (determined display time) Ta2 and the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the symbol display device 253 are displayed in the operating port display section of the main display unit 87. The symbol final stop display time (determined display time) Tb2 coincides, and the symbol stop display start timing in the working port display unit coincides with the symbol final stop display start timing in the symbol display device 253. That is, the symbol stop display and the symbol stop display are synchronized.

  On the other hand, when the special performance mode is set in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the stop display time (determined display time) Ta3 of the pattern in the display part for the working port of the main display unit 87 The symbol final stop display time (determined display time) Tb3 on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the symbol display device 253 matches the symbol stop display start timing of the symbol on the working port display unit and the symbol display device 253. Although the final stop display start timing of the symbols coincides, the temporary stop display time Tb4 of the symbols in the symbol display device 253 coincides with the fixed display times Ta2 and Tb2 of the symbols and symbols in the short-time effect mode. In addition, it is shorter than the fixed display times Ta3 and Tb3 of the pictures and symbols in the special effect mode.

  For this reason, during the special effect mode, the display on the symbol display device 253 is the same as the display in the short-time effect mode under the situation where the first special effect is repeated during the variable display of the pattern, and the display contents on the symbol display device 253 It is difficult to specify the difference between the short-time effect mode and the special effect mode simply by looking at the above. Here, in the special effect mode, the temporary stop display time Tb4 in the case of performing the temporary stop display is shorter than the fixed display times Ta3 and Tb3. It will be. In the first embodiment, as such a countermeasure, the time for displaying a moving image using the character CP1 is set to 2 seconds, and when the moving image display is executed at the end of the game time, it overlaps with the fixed display time. By comprising in this way, generation | occurrence | production of the said uncomfortable feeling is suppressed. One of the features of the present embodiment is that a device for further reducing such a sense of harm is made.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, the fixed display time of the pattern in the normal gaming state compatible with the low frequency support mode is the same as the fixed display time (1 sec) of the graphic in the normal gaming state compatible with the high frequency support mode. It is set to be. In other words, the stop display time is configured so that there is no difference between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. In the normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the symbol stop display and the symbol stop display are synchronized as in the first embodiment. In the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the symbol stop display and the symbol stop display are synchronized during the special effect mode, and the symbol stop display and the symbol stop display are partially asynchronous during the normal effect mode. It is comprised so that. Specifically, during the normal production mode, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the symbol is displayed on a standby line (temporary stop display) on the active line of the variable display area ME, and a predetermined standby time (this implementation is performed) from the start of the standby display. In this form, the display is shifted to the fixed display at the timing when 1 sec) has elapsed.

  In the MPU 472 of the display control device 410, the standby display control process, which is the standby display process, is executed as part of the display control process (periodic process). Hereinafter, the configuration related to the standby display will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing standby display control processing executed by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410, FIG. 55B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and standby display, and FIG. 56 is standby display. FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing a game flow.

(Standby display control process)
As shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the standby control process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not re-variable display is being performed. In the present embodiment, in a part of the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, a part of the symbol string is re-varied from the state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed on standby, and the effective line is displayed at the time of final display. There is a case where a display (re-variable display) for switching the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed above to the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the re-variation display is being performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether standby display is being performed. If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103 to determine whether it is a standby display start timing. In the present embodiment, the MPU 442 of the notification / production control device 140 determines whether to perform standby display, and the information is transmitted to the display control device 410. The MPU 442 of the notification / production control device 140 determines whether or not the game time to be started corresponds to reach display, and sets standby display when it corresponds to reach display. Further, when it corresponds to complete detachment, whether or not standby display is possible is determined based on the number of subsequent hold information. Specifically, when the number of subsequent pending information is smaller than a predetermined number (two in the present embodiment), it is determined that standby display is performed, and when the predetermined number has been reached, the standby display is performed. It is determined that no display is performed. That is, when the subsequent display information reaches a predetermined number and the variable display time is greatly shortened, standby display is avoided.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the standby display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, a standby display start process is executed in step S2104, and then the standby display control process ends. In the standby display control process, a symbol combination corresponding to the result of detachment is temporarily stopped on the active line, and the symbol group that has been temporarily stopped is swung in the scroll direction on the effective line.

  Returning to the description of step S2102, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if the standby display is being performed, in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2105. Determine whether or not. As described above, in the present embodiment, standby display → revariable display is executed in a part of the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2106.

  In step S2106, it is determined whether it is the start timing of re-variable display. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing immediately before the confirmation display. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, the standby display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, the standby display control process is terminated after the re-variable display start process is executed in step S2106. In the re-variable display start process, scroll display of a part of the symbol row is resumed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2105, if it is determined that the game number does not correspond to the re-variable display, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether it is the final stop display timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display time in the current game time has elapsed (the timing when the variation end command is received). If a negative determination is made in step S2108, the standby display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109, and after executing the final stop display process, the standby display control process is terminated. In the final stop display process when the re-variation display is not passed, the symbol combination currently displayed on the active line (while swinging) is stopped as it is, and the symbol combination corresponding to the detachment result is displayed as the final stop display ( (Determined display).

  Returning to the description of step S2101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is determined that re-variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether it is the final stop display timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display time in the current game time has elapsed (the timing when the variation end command is received). If a negative determination is made in step S2108, the standby display control process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109, and after executing the final stop display process, the standby display control process is terminated. In the final stop display process when re-variable display is used, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped on the active line for the symbol being scrolled, and the symbol combination is displayed in the final stop display (confirmed display). )

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the symbol display when standby display occurs will be described. FIG. 56A illustrates the case where the reach display is used, and FIG. 56B illustrates the case where the reach display is not used.

  In FIG. 56 (a), the standby display is performed by the symbol combination corresponding to the detachment result through the reach display. In the standby display, each symbol constituting the symbol combination swings left and right on the effective line. If the current game time corresponds to a missed result, all symbols will be unrocked at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the standby display, and a symbol combination corresponding to the missed result will be displayed. The final stop display (definite display) will be performed on the active line. As a result, the player is clearly informed that the result has been lost.

  On the other hand, when the current game time corresponds to the jackpot result, the swing is released at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the standby display is started, and the middle symbol row is scrolled to be effective. The symbol combination displayed on the line is changed from one corresponding to the outlier result to one corresponding to the jackpot result. As a result, the player is clearly informed that the jackpot result has been achieved.

  In the game times corresponding to the win reach display, the symbol combination corresponding to the big hit result may be displayed as a final stop display (determined display) without going through the standby display. The number of symbol combinations corresponding to the jackpot result after the variable display is larger than that in the case where the final stop display is performed.

  In FIG. 56 (b), the standby display by the symbol combination corresponding to the detachment result is executed without the reach display. In the standby display, each symbol constituting the symbol combination swings left and right on the effective line. If the current game time corresponds to a missed result, all symbols will be unrocked at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the standby display, and a symbol combination corresponding to the missed result will be displayed. The final stop display (definite display) will be performed on the active line. As a result, the player is clearly informed that the result has been lost.

  On the other hand, when the game times this time correspond to the jackpot result, the swing is released at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the standby display, and a part of the symbol sequence (for example, The symbol combination is scrolled and the symbol combination displayed on the active line is changed from the one corresponding to the outlier result to the one corresponding to the jackpot result. As a result, the player is clearly informed that the jackpot result has been achieved.

  Next, a game flow in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In FIG. 57, as in FIG. 54, Ta is the time related to the pattern display for the working port display section of the main display unit, and the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 (specifically, the variable display area ME and the reduced display area SE). Time related to symbol display is distinguished as Tb.

  When the short-time effect mode is set in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, as shown in the center of FIG. The display time) Ta6 and the symbol final stop display time (determined display time) Tb6 on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the symbol display device 253 coincide with each other, and the symbol stop display start timing on the working port display unit The final stop display start timing of the symbols in the symbol display device 253 coincides. That is, the symbol stop display and the symbol stop display are synchronized.

  When the special effect mode is set in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, as shown on the right side of FIG. The display time) Ta7 and the symbol final stop display time (determined display time) Tb7 on the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) of the symbol display device 253 coincide with each other, and the symbol stop display start timing on the working port display unit The final stop display start timing of the symbols on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) coincides. That is, the symbol stop display and the symbol stop display are synchronized.

  On the other hand, when the normal performance mode is set in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the display stop time (determined display time) Ta5 of the pattern in the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87 is set. The symbol final stop display time (determined display time) Tb5 on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the symbol display device 253 coincides, and the stop display start timing of the symbol on the display unit for the working port and the symbol display device 253 Although the final stop display start timing of the symbols coincides, the total stop display time TbX (2 sec) including the symbol standby display time in the symbol display device 253 is longer than the fixed display times Ta5 and Tb5 (1 sec). It has become. That is, in the symbol display device 253, the symbol is in a standby display state prior to the fixed display, and the stop display time is extended by the standby display. By extending the stop display time by the standby display, the symbol stop display time can be secured to a certain extent. This is a preferable configuration for prompting the player to understand the game result.

  Here, in the special effect mode, the temporary stop display time Tb8 coincides with the fixed display times Ta7 and Tb7. For this reason, even when the game times are constituted by a plurality of parts by the first special effect or the like, it is possible to prevent the boundary between the game times from becoming conspicuous due to the difference between the temporary stop display time and the final stop display time. . In this way, if the existing configuration is used successfully, an uncomfortable feeling occurs when an effect similar to the effect in the short-time effect mode is executed in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode while suppressing the complication of the structure. Can be suitably suppressed. In addition, since it is possible to perform symbol stop display in a preferred manner according to the gaming state while switching the fixed display time according to the gaming state is unnecessary, it is also possible to suitably suppress a reduction in the progress of the game progress. .

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration that is a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) In each of the above embodiments, the special performance mode is entered when the number of games executed in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode has reached a preset number. You may change the opportunity to transfer to special production mode as follows. That is, when a predetermined time condition is satisfied (for example, when the time elapsed in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode becomes a predetermined time or a predetermined time), the special effect mode is entered. It is good also as a structure. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which enables selection operation of the production mode by a player, and transfers to the said special production mode when the special production mode is designated by the said selection operation. Moreover, it is also possible to use these various transition opportunities together.

  (2) A plurality of first special effects shown in the above embodiments may be provided. Specifically, as the first special effect, a first special effect A and a first special effect B having different jackpot expectations are provided, and when a reach display that is a jackpot result is executed, a first that is a precursor. A configuration in which the first special effect B is likely to be set as the special effect, and a configuration in which the first special effect A is easily set as the first special effect when the reach display resulting from the detachment is executed or when the reach display is not executed. It is also possible. For example, for the girl character CP1 displayed in the first special effect A, the color of the girl character CP1 is white in the first special effect A, and in the first special effect B, the character of the girl character CP1 is It is better to differentiate by making the color red.

  (3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the allocation of the first special effect and the second special effect in the subsequent game times is determined in consideration of the number of continuous fluctuations across the game times. It is not limited. The special pattern table can be simplified by restricting the number of continuous fluctuations to “0” at the end of the game round and eliminating the influence on the subsequent game round. However, if there is a lot of stored hold information (a situation where the time-shortening function works greatly), if you try to complete the continuous variation at each game time, the divergence from the short-time effect mode where the game progresses at a good tempo. Becomes larger. Therefore, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the restriction is determined according to the number of subsequent hold information. For example, in the configuration in which the variable display time is greatly shortened when the number of stored hold information is 2 or more, the above restriction is performed when the number of stored hold information is less than “2”. In the case of “2” or more, it is preferable that the above regulation is not performed.

  (4) In each of the above-described embodiments, when a command corresponding to outreach reach is received during the special effect mode, the first special effect is performed at the time before the reach display shift as a configuration for executing outreach display. Although the configuration is repeated, it is not limited to this. For example, when a command corresponding to detach reach is received during the special effect mode, the notification / effect control device 140 may determine whether to perform reach display. In the case where no outreach is performed, the number of times of execution of the first special effect can be earned by making all sections subject to division.

  In each of the above embodiments, the configuration in which the reach display is executed only once during one game is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. This does not deny a configuration in which reach display is executed a plurality of times during one game. In such a configuration, at least the reach display executed before the final reach display may be configured to notify the result of disengagement.

  (5) About the 2nd special production shown in each above-mentioned embodiment, although the execution time was constituted so that it might become longer than the execution time of the 1st special production, how much the execution time of the 2nd special production The length is arbitrary. For example, it may be the same as the execution time of the first special effect, or may be shorter than the execution time of the first special effect.

  Moreover, about the 3rd special effect shown in each said embodiment, the execution time was comprised so that it might become the same as the execution time of a 1st special effect, but how long the execution time of a 3rd special effect is set. It is arbitrary as to whether or not to assume. For example, it may be shorter or longer than the execution time of the first special effect. However, in view of the fact that the second special effect and the third special effect function as a stopper that stops the continuation of the first special effect, it is preferable to make the execution times of the second special effect and the third special effect different.

  In addition, when determining the production pattern in the notification / production control device 140, the first special production to the third special production are smoothly allocated, and the occurrence of excess or deficiency with the variable display time is alleviated. Then, it is technically significant to make the execution times of the second special effect and the third special effect an integer multiple of the execution time of the first special effect set as the reference time.

  (6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the arrangement of the first special effect to the third special effect is determined at the start of the change. It is also possible to replace the second special effect and the third special effect at the start of the effect and the third special effect. According to such a configuration, the effect pattern can be changed until the start of the second special effect or the third special effect. For example, it becomes possible to change the effect pattern in consideration of the subsequent holding information newly added after the start of the game times, thereby strengthening the cooperation between the previous and next game times.

  (7) In the above embodiments, the first special effect in the special effect mode is configured to temporarily stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the complete deviation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the re-variable symbol combination (temporary stop symbol combination) may be temporarily stopped as in the normal performance mode. Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which any one of the re-variable symbol combination and the completely off symbol combination is stopped and displayed according to the game result or the like.

  Even if the re-variable symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first special effect mode in the special effect mode, the second special effect and the third special effect are executed during the game round. It is preferable to achieve differentiation from the first special effect by adopting a configuration in which a completely out of symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second special effect and the third special effect.

  (8) In each of the above-described embodiments, various special pattern tables are configured so that the second special effect does not occur continuously for the purpose of earning an opportunity for the generation of the first special effect. By changing this, various special pattern tables can be configured so that the second special effects can be generated continuously. Similarly, various special pattern tables can be configured so that the third special effect can be continuously generated. It is also possible to configure various special pattern tables so that the second special effect and the third special effect can occur continuously. Note that the combination of these patterns is not denied.

  (9) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit such as the first continuous number of times in the special effect mode is set from the relationship with the pseudo continuous variation display executed in the normal effect mode. It is not a thing. The upper limit may be set regardless of the pseudo continuous variation display. Also, the upper limit need not be a variable parameter, but can be a fixed parameter.

  By the way, in the pseudo continuous fluctuation display, the example of the case where the super reach is confirmed when the number of consecutive times is 4 and the jackpot is confirmed when the number of continuous times is 6 is illustrated. It is arbitrary whether or not to indicate the variable display mode and the game result. Further, the maximum number of continuous times in the pseudo continuous variation display may be arbitrarily changed.

  (10) In each of the above embodiments, the effect display is performed as part of the notice effect straddling the game times during the short-time effect mode, and the effect display is also performed in the special effect mode. Can be omitted.

  (11) In each of the above embodiments, the effect display in the special effect mode has a configuration in which the number of continuous fluctuations and the effect level may be different from each other, and the two are not necessarily the same. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the effect level and the effect level are matched.

  (12) In each of the above embodiments, the case where the special effect mode is shifted to the normal effect mode via the third special effect is illustrated, but the same function can be given to the second special effect. . Thereby, the variation of the production | presentation pattern prescribed | regulated by the 9th special pattern table-the 12th special pattern table can be increased, and the opportunity that a 1st special production is performed can be increased.

  (13) In each of the above embodiments, the execution time of the first special effect is one type (2 sec), but a plurality of execution times of the first special effect may be provided. Even in this case, it is preferable to consider the execution time of the game times in the high frequency support mode when setting the execution time. For example, in the first embodiment, as the variable display time when no reach occurs, 1 sec is set when the hold count is 2 to 4, and 2 sec is set when the hold count is 1. ing. In order to increase the execution time of the first special effect, the execution time of the first special effect to be added is 3 sec (variable display time 2 sec + temporary stop display time 1 sec) in consideration of the next shortest variable display time 2 sec + confirmed display time 1 sec. It is preferable that

  (14) In each of the above embodiments, in the short time effect mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the special effect mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the symbols are displayed in the reduced display area SE on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the symbols are displayed in the variable display area ME as in the normal performance mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

  (15) In each of the above embodiments, the number of parts (the number of times the first special effect can be executed) is specified by a calculation process that divides the interval before the transition display time or reach display shift by the reference time, and based on the specification result Although the first special effect to the third special effect are distributed, the calculation process can be omitted by storing a special pattern table corresponding to various variable display times. However, in the case where each special pattern table is provided corresponding to various variable display times, it is difficult to share the special pattern table and the number is easily increased as compared with the case where the special pattern table is provided depending on the number of parts. In particular, such inconvenience becomes noticeable when the execution time of reach display is different even with the same variable display time (see, for example, the second embodiment). Thus, storing the special pattern table according to the number of parts has a technical significance that it can contribute to the reduction of the amount of information stored in the notification / production control device 140.

  (16) In the first to fourth embodiments, the case where the fixed display time in the low frequency support mode is shorter than the fixed display time in the high frequency support mode is exemplified. However, the fixed display time in each mode The relationship is arbitrary. For example, the fixed display time during the low frequency support mode and the fixed display time during the high frequency support mode can be made the same.

  (17) In the second embodiment described above, a configuration in which a plurality of time required for reach display is provided when super reach D is executed in the special effect mode is described. Is not limited to two of short / long and is arbitrary. For example, the number of short / middle / long may be three, or four or more.

  In addition, the game times in which the super reach D is executed are configured to have a plurality of timings from the start of the game times to the reach display when compared with the same variable display time. Need not be the same length as the reference time. However, in order to make a difference in the number of continuous fluctuations (continuous number) executed before reach display by securing the execution time of the first predetermined effect using the difference in timing, the difference is set to the first It is preferable to make it longer than the execution time (reference time) of the predetermined effect. As in the case of the second embodiment, if this difference is set to be an integral multiple of the reference time, the smoothness of the production flow is impaired in producing a difference in the number of continuous fluctuations. Can be suitably suppressed.

  (18) In the third embodiment, the transition timing to reach display in the next game round is determined in consideration of the effect pattern of the previous game round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. It is good also as a structure which divides whether to consider the effect pattern of the previous game time according to the interval time from the previous game time. For example, when the next game round starts immediately after the end of the previous game round (that is, when the hold information of the next game round is secured by the end of the previous game round), the previous game round When the next game round is started after the end of the previous game round (that is, the hold information of the next game round has been secured by the end of the previous game round) In the case where there is not, it is possible to adopt a configuration that does not take into consideration the effect pattern of the previous game times. Note that the criterion for consideration / non-consideration is not limited to the interval period = 0. The interval period used as a criterion may be arbitrarily changed as long as the player recognizes that the previous game time and the subsequent game time are continuously executed.

  (19) In the fifth embodiment, the standby display is performed by swinging the symbol in the scroll direction. However, it is possible that at least the symbol is maintained on the effective line and may change again. It is sufficient if it can be suggested, and the specific mode of the standby display is arbitrary. For example, the symbol may be repeatedly enlarged / reduced on the active line, the symbol may be repeatedly changed between a low state and a high state, or the symbol or an effect associated with the symbol blinks. It may be configured to (flash).

  (20) In the short-time effect mode, the number of remaining games maintained in the high-frequency support mode is basically unspecified, and in the special effect mode, the number of remaining games maintained in the special effect mode is also set accordingly. Although explicitly stated, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which information corresponding to the remaining number of times is clearly indicated in each effect mode. For example, a counter indicating the remaining number of times may be displayed on the display screen 253a. In the short time effect mode, the value of this counter is updated (for example, subtracted) as the game times are consumed. In the special effect mode, the first special effect, the second special effect (reach display non-developed), and the third The counter value may be updated (for example, subtracted) every time various effects such as special effects are executed. Thereby, the effect of making the special effect mode resemble the short-time effect mode can be more suitably exhibited.

  In addition, as shown in the above-described embodiment, when it is determined by lottery whether or not the special effect mode can be ended, after the counter becomes “0”, for example, when the special effect mode ends. A display indicating that the situation is not strange (for example, a message such as “WARNING”) may be performed.

  In addition, the special effect mode may be terminated when the counter value reaches “0”, and the above-described delay or the like may not be generated. I want to devise a production pattern in the game times. For example, an event may occur in which the counter value becomes “0” during game play, that is, an event such as transition to the normal performance mode during game play. In such a case, the counter becomes “0”. It is preferable that the part up to is composed of the first special effect to the third special effect corresponding to the special effect mode, and the part after becoming “0” is composed of the effect corresponding to the normal effect mode.

  (21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the minimum continuation number of the high-frequency support mode is 10 times. However, the minimum continuation number of the high-frequency support mode is changed by one game number (the first special effect to the third special effect). It is arbitrary as long as it is set to be larger than the maximum number of times that the special effect or the like can be executed. In each of the above-described embodiments, in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the longest variation display time in the non-reach game time is 17 sec. In this variation display time, the number of parts is “9”, and when the upper limit of the number of continuous times is “3”, the maximum number of times of pseudo variation is seven. On the other hand, the longest change display time in the game times of reach generation is 28 sec. In this variable display time, the number of remaining parts when the reach display time and the branch effect time are taken into consideration is “6”, and the maximum number of pseudo-variable executions when the upper limit of the continuous number is “6” is six times. It becomes. In such a case, the minimum continuation number may be set to be 8 or more in consideration of the former. In accordance with this, it is preferable to set the minimum number of continuations to be 8 times or more in the case of shifting to the special effect mode in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

  (22) In each of the above embodiments, a lower limit is set for the number of continuations of the special effect mode (the number of executions of the pseudo variation), and after reaching the lower limit, whether or not the special effect mode can be continued is determined by lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of continuations in the special effect mode (the number of executions of the pseudo variation) is matched with the candidate for the number of continuations in the high frequency support mode.

  (23) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game combination that results in the jackpot result is configured to stop display (determined display) the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result through reach display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result may be stopped and displayed (determined display) without a reach display in a part of the game times that will be the jackpot result. In such a configuration, in the game times that result in the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped (determined display) via the reach display, or the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result without the reach display. The notification / production control device 140 may be left to determine whether to stop display (determined display). For example, in the case where game times that are jackpot results are executed during the special effect mode, the number of times of execution of the first special effect in the game times (including at least the immediately preceding game times) executed before the corresponding game times ( That is, it is determined whether or not the reach display is performed in consideration of the continuous number of the first special effects before the corresponding game times, and when it is determined that the reach display is performed, The number of times of execution of the first special effect may be determined in consideration of the number of times of execution of the first special effect in the previous game times (that is, the consecutive number of times of the first special effect before the game times).

  (24) In the configuration in which the first special effect is continued across the game times by the cooperation of the previous game time and the subsequent game times, based on the fact that a predetermined avoidance condition is established during the interval between both game times. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that avoids cooperation between the two game times, for example, a configuration that does not consider the effect pattern of the previous game times when determining the effect pattern in the subsequent game times. The predetermined avoidance conditions include, for example, that the gaming machine is turned off, the gaming machine control mode is switched to a power saving mode that consumes less power than normal, and the symbol display device 253 shifts to a demonstration display. This includes at least one of the menu display for adjusting the volume and the like based on the player's operation. When the game is substantially interrupted, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of freedom of setting the effect pattern in the subsequent game times by adopting a configuration that does not consider the effect pattern of the previous game times.

  (25) When the first special effect is repeated across the second special effect and the third special effect, the number of consecutive first special effects before the second special effect and the third special effect, A correlation may be given to the number of consecutive special effects. For example, when determining the number of consecutive times of the first special effect in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, the ratio of the effect pattern to be matched with the previous number of consecutive times is higher than the ratio of the effect pattern not matched An effect pattern in which the ratio of the effect pattern to be matched with the previous consecutive number is set when determining the number of consecutive times of the first special effect in the game times that do not correspond to the jackpot result by providing a difference so as to increase It is also possible to provide a difference so as to be lower than the ratio. In such a configuration, if each difference is increased and the subsequent success count matches the previous success count, the jackpot result is confirmed or the expectation that the jackpot result is high is assumed. Good.

  (26) In the special effect mode, the effect pattern at the game time is determined at the start of the game time. When a plurality of hold information is stored, the effect of each game time related to the hold information is stored. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which patterns are determined collectively. For example, when hold information is newly stored in the special effect mode, it may be configured to collectively determine the effect pattern of each game time related to the hold information and the hold information stored before that. . If the above configuration is applied to a configuration in which a special effect is executed across a plurality of game times as shown in the above embodiments, it is possible to contribute to optimization of the effect pattern.

  (27) In a configuration in which the degree of expectation that is a jackpot result increases as the number of consecutive first special effects increases, a branch effect indicating whether or not the first special effects continue may be provided. That is, there may be provided an effect pattern in which the continuous number of first special effects is inherited across the branch effect and an effect pattern in which the continuous number of first special effects is not inherited across the branch effect. With such a configuration, when the first special effect is repeated, it is possible to divide the first special effect before and after the branch effect, so even if the first special effect is repeated, It can suppress suitably that the frequency | count of continuous increases excessively.

  (28) In each of the above embodiments, as a part of the display effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the disengagement result is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or temporarily stopped) before the final display, but for example, a game corresponding to the jackpot result The symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result (for example, the symbol combination that is confirmed and displayed in this game round) is stopped (temporarily stopped or temporarily stopped) before the symbol combination is confirmed and displayed in part of the times. It is also possible. For example, in some cases where the fact that a jackpot result is notified through a plurality of first special effects → second special effects → third special effects, at least one of the plurality of first special effects corresponds to the jackpot result. The symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination that is confirmed and displayed in this game) may be stopped (temporarily stopped or temporarily stopped).

  (29) In the case where information such as success / failure in the subsequent game round is specified before the subsequent game round is started, the information is finally stopped at the game round executed before the subsequent game round. A symbol combination (a symbol combination that is confirmed and displayed) may be determined in consideration of the specific result. For example, if the subsequent game times correspond to the jackpot result, the subsequent game times should be the jackpot result for the symbol combination that is finally stopped at the previous game time (corresponding to the missed result) It is good to use a symbol combination that suggests or clearly indicates.

  Also, as shown in the modification (26) above, when determining the effect pattern of a plurality of game times at once, information such as the success or failure of the game time to be executed last among the plurality of game times is displayed. In consideration of this, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a symbol combination or the like of a game executed before that (for example, a symbol combination that is finally stopped or a symbol combination that is temporarily stopped) is determined.

  (30) The number of reach displays executed during one game round is arbitrary, and a configuration in which reach display is executed a plurality of times is also possible. As described above, when a reach display is executed a plurality of times during one game time, the number of times of the first special effects to be executed up to the time of development to each reach display or the time of development to each reach display is changed in the game time. It is good also as a structure which memorize | stores in the state patterned according to display time (for example, memorize | stores as an effect pattern table), and selects which effect pattern is made from these patterns. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the control load from becoming excessively large when determining the production pattern, while enhancing the production function by giving a correspondence relationship to the front and rear reach display.

  For example, as shown in the modified example (17), when the reach display is executed as short, middle, and long, and when the reach display execution time is different, the jackpot result depends on the length of time. It is also possible to change the degree of expectation. When combining such a configuration with the configuration shown in the present modification, the combination of the previous reach display and the subsequent reach display changes the expectation level resulting in the jackpot result, and the front and rear reach display is linked. It is good to strengthen. Specifically, it is preferable that the degree of expectation resulting in a jackpot result varies depending on how the length and type of the previous reach display and the length and type of the subsequent reach display are combined. For example, when a relatively high expectation long is set as the length of the previous reach display and a relatively low expectation short is set as the length of the subsequent reach display, It is preferable that the degree of expectation resulting in a jackpot result be extremely high in comparison. According to the configuration shown in this modification, not only the number of consecutive first special effects but also the degree of expectation that results in a jackpot result changes depending on the relationship between reach displays executed multiple times, and the degree of attention to the game Further improvement can be expected.

  (31) In each of the above embodiments, the notification / production control device 140 and the display control device 410 are provided separately, but one control device that integrates the functions of these control devices 140 and 410 may be provided. .

  (32) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. Thus, the present invention is also applied to a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out medals when a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel stops. Applicable.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
The following feature A group is: “There is a game machine such as a pachinko machine having a picture display device that displays a picture on a display screen in a variable manner. In this type of game machine, for example, it is provided in a game area. In response to a winning at the operating opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, is generated, and a variation display of the pattern is started. Regarding the background technology that a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), However, there is still room for improvement in the construction of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. ” It is those that have been.

Feature A1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162);
Grant determination means (main control) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result (a jackpot result) corresponding to granting a privilege to the player A function of executing a lottery process or the like in the MPU 402 of the device 162),
The game-turning operation is performed with one game round being the end of the game-turning action due to the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means from the start of the game-round action. And a game number control means (a function for executing the game number control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling predetermined notification means (the display part for the operating port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game time control means determines the operation period (variable display time) of the operation for game play for each game time (function to execute variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of the main controller 162). Have
When the game turning operation is performed, the effect executing means for executing the effect in parallel with the game turning operation (the variable display control process is executed by the MPU 442 of the symbol display device 253 and the notification / effect control device 140) Function)
As one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided,
Based on the operation period determined by the period determining means and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect, the number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed during the game is specified, and the game time is determined based on the specified result. A game machine comprising an execution number determination means (a function for determining an effect pattern by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for determining the number of executions of the predetermined effect.

  According to the feature A1, for example, a predetermined effect is repeated within a possible range during the game play. In game machines, the operation period is generally set for various reasons, for example, to suppress monotonization of games. According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined after specifying how much the predetermined effect can be executed based on the determined operation period and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect according to various operation periods. Thereby, the improvement effect of the attention degree to the game by a predetermined effect can be exhibited suitably.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 performs a winning process for the operation port”). Function to be executed), acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main controller 162), and special information stored in the acquisition information storage means Is a determination unit for determining whether or not the result corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (a function for executing a process such as winning / failing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). When the game turning operation is started, the game turning operation is terminated by the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means. In a gaming machine comprising game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling predetermined notification means so that the game turning operation is performed, The game times control means has period determining means (function for executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main controller 162) for determining an operation period of the game times operation for each game time. An effect executing means (a function of executing a variable display control process in the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that executes an effect when the revolving operation is performed is provided by the effect executing means. As one of the effects to be executed, a predetermined effect is provided such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period, and is determined by the period determining means. In addition, based on the operation period and the performance execution period of the predetermined performance, the execution frequency determining means for determining the number of executions of the predetermined performance to be executed during the game time (effect pattern in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) It is also possible to use a gaming machine characterized by having a function for determining

Feature A2. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162);
Grant determination means (main control) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result (a jackpot result) corresponding to granting a privilege to the player A function of executing a lottery process or the like in the MPU 402 of the device 162),
The game-turning operation is performed with one game round being the end of the game-turning action due to the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means from the start of the game-round action. And a game number control means (a function for executing the game number control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling predetermined notification means (the display part for the operating port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game time control means determines the operation period (variable display time) of the operation for game play for each game time (function to execute variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of the main controller 162). Have
When the game turning operation is performed, the effect executing means for executing the effect in parallel with the game turning operation (the variable display control process is executed by the MPU 442 of the symbol display device 253 and the notification / effect control device 140) Function)
As one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided,
Number-of-times specifying means (notification / effect control device 140) for specifying the number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed during a game based on the operation period determined by the period determining means and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. The function of calculating the number of parts by the MPU 442),
Execution number determination means (a function for setting an effect pattern by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for determining the number of executions of executing the predetermined effect during the game time based on the specification result by the number specifying means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A2, for example, a predetermined effect is repeated within a possible range during the game play. In game machines, the operation period is generally set for various reasons, for example, to suppress monotonization of games. According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined after specifying how much the predetermined effect can be executed based on the determined operation period and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect according to various operation periods. Thereby, the improvement effect of the attention degree to the game by a predetermined effect can be exhibited suitably.

  Feature A3. The feature number A1 or feature A2 is characterized in that the execution number determination unit is configured to determine the number of executions of the predetermined effect based on the operation period, the effect execution period, and the determination result of the provision determination unit. The gaming machine described in 1.

  By determining the number of executions of the predetermined effect based on the determination result by the determination unit, it is possible to provide a relationship between the determination result and the number of executions. For example, by making a difference in the number of executions between the case of the assignment correspondence result and the case of not being the assignment correspondence result, the determination result can be suggested by a predetermined effect. Thereby, the attention degree improvement effect shown in the feature A1 or the like can be suitably exhibited.

Feature A4. The execution frequency determination means includes
Setting means (a function for setting the upper limit in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for setting an upper limit number of times (for example, the first continuous number of times) based on the determination result by the grant determination unit;
Limiting means for limiting the number of executions of the predetermined effect so that the number of executions of the predetermined effect does not exceed the upper limit number (a function of limiting the number of consecutive times by the MPU 442 of the notification / production control device 140). The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein:

  In the configuration in which the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined according to the operation period as shown in the feature A1 or the like, the number of executions of the predetermined effect increases as the operation period becomes longer. However, if the relationship between the operation period and the number of executions becomes excessively strong in this way, there is a concern that it will be difficult to reflect the result of the grant determination. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit number is set based on the result of the grant determination and the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined within a range not exceeding the upper limit number, the predetermined effect is temporarily executed. Even when the number of possible times is large, it is possible to limit the actual number of executions by the limiting unit so that the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A5. The effect execution means is configured to suggest an expectation level that is the result of the assignment according to the number of executions when the predetermined effect is continuously executed.
The execution frequency determination means includes
Setting means (a function for setting the upper limit in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for setting an upper limit number of times (for example, the first continuous number of times) based on the determination result by the grant determination unit;
Limiting means for limiting the number of executions of the predetermined effect so that the number of times that the predetermined effect is continuously executed does not exceed the upper limit number (a function of limiting the number of consecutive times by the MPU 442 of the notification / production control device 140); A gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein

  In the configuration in which the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined according to the operation period as shown in the feature A1 or the like, the continuous number of the predetermined effects increases as the operation period becomes longer. However, if the relationship between the operation period and the number of executions becomes excessively strong in this way, there is a concern that it will be difficult to reflect the result of the grant determination. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the maximum number of times is set based on the result of the grant determination, and the number of consecutive predetermined effects is determined within a range not exceeding the maximum number of times, the predetermined effect is temporarily executed. Even if the number of possible times is large, the limiting means can be adjusted to reduce the number of continuous times, and the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

  Note that “when the predetermined effect is continuously executed” means that the predetermined effect is executed again after the predetermined effect is completed, that is, another effect (for example, a second predetermined effect described later) is interposed. This includes the case where the predetermined performance is continuously executed without performing the operation.

Feature A6. The predetermined effect is a first predetermined effect,
As one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, a second predetermined effect (for example, a second special effect or a third special effect) different from the first predetermined effect is provided,
When the number of times that the first predetermined effect can be executed exceeds the upper limit number, the limiting means executes the second predetermined effect so that the first predetermined effect is continuously executed. The gaming machine according to Feature A5, which is configured to limit

  According to this feature, by interposing the second predetermined effect, the first predetermined effect is limited so as not to exceed the upper limit number of times. In a configuration in which the degree of expectation of the assignment correspondence result is suggested by the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect is used to prevent the first predetermined effect from being continued, thereby improving the degree of attention to the game. Also, it is possible to easily tell the player that the first predetermined production has ended.

  Note that the second predetermined effect includes, for example, a branch effect that is a branch of whether or not to develop a reach effect or a reach effect.

  Incidentally, it is also possible to apply the technical idea described above to the feature A4. In this case, the configuration shown in this feature is “the predetermined effect is a first predetermined effect, and as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, a second predetermined effect different from the first predetermined effect (for example, the first effect) 2 special effects and third special effects) are provided, and the limiting means executes the second predetermined effect when the number of times the first predetermined effect can be executed exceeds the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to Feature A4, which is configured to limit the number of times the first predetermined effect is executed.

  Feature A7. The limiting means executes the first predetermined effect before the second predetermined effect by interposing the second predetermined effect when the number of times that the first predetermined effect can be executed exceeds the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to Feature A6, further comprising means for separating what is to be executed and what is to be executed later.

  By adopting a configuration in which the second predetermined effect is interposed in the first predetermined effect group, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of consecutive times while suppressing an excessive decrease in the number of executions of the first predetermined effect.

  In addition, as shown in the feature A6 and the feature A7, when the second predetermined effect is executed in a period in which the first predetermined effect can be executed, for example, a part of the first predetermined effect group is used for the second predetermined effect. It is preferable to use a replacement configuration.

  Feature A8. As a mode in the case of interposing the second predetermined effect, the restricting unit is configured such that the number of continuous times of the first predetermined effect that is executed before the second predetermined effect is executed after the second predetermined effect. The first mode in which the number of continuous times of the first predetermined effect is greater, and the second number of times that the continuous number of the first predetermined effect that is executed before the second predetermined effect is executed after the second predetermined effect. And a second aspect that is less than the number of consecutive predetermined effects, and when the determination result by the determination is the corresponding result, the second predetermined in the second aspect rather than the first aspect. The gaming machine according to Feature A7, wherein the game machine is configured to increase the number of effects.

  In the game times corresponding to the determination result, when the first predetermined effect group is divided into front and rear by the second predetermined effect, the number of consecutive first predetermined effects after the second predetermined effect is likely to increase. The player's sense of expectation can be suitably enhanced in the process of reporting the assignment correspondence result. If the continuous number of the first predetermined effects can be increased as much as possible (within the limit) in the portion following the notification of the grant correspondence result, the player's attention will be increased toward notification while diversifying the effects. Can be encouraged.

  Feature A9. The restricting means is configured so that the second predetermined effect is more often interposed in the first mode than in the second mode when the determination result by the grant determination is not the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein:

  When the first predetermined performance group is divided into the front and the rear by the second predetermined performance in the game times that do not correspond to the grant determination result, the number of consecutive first predetermined effects before the second predetermined performance is likely to increase. The effects shown in the feature A8 can be more suitably exhibited.

  Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A9, wherein an execution period of the second predetermined effect is configured to be an integral multiple of an execution period of the first predetermined effect.

  As shown in feature A6 or the like, in order to limit the number of times of the first predetermined effect (number of consecutive times) using the second predetermined effect, the execution period of the second predetermined effect is set to the first predetermined effect as shown in this feature. The following effects can be expected by setting an integral multiple (× 1, 2, 3...) That is, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the influence of the first predetermined effect that would otherwise have been secured by the intervention of the second predetermined effect and the first predetermined effect not being executed successfully. . Therefore, it can be avoided that the result specified in advance cannot be diverted and the number of times is specified or the production layout is re-executed. This is preferable for facilitating the progress of the production.

Feature A11. Related information storage means (continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140) for storing information on the execution status of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means,
In the case where the effect in the game times before the current game time is ended in the predetermined effect, the limiting means is the number of times that the predetermined effect is continuously executed from the previous game time. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A10, further comprising special restricting means for restricting the number of executions of the predetermined effect so as not to exceed.

  In a configuration in which a predetermined effect is repeatedly executed during a game time, there is a possibility that the predetermined effect executed in the previous game time and the predetermined effect executed in the later game time appear to be continuous. is there. Therefore, when a predetermined effect is executed at the end of the previous game round, the predetermined effect is continuously exceeded beyond the limit by preventing the continuous number of times including the predetermined effect from exceeding the predetermined number. It can suppress that it seems to be. This is preferable in order to suppress the puzzle of the player.

  In the combination with the features A6 to A10, the “predetermined effect” shown in this feature may be the “first predetermined effect”.

  Feature A12. The special restriction means restricts the restriction when an interval period from the end of the predetermined effect at the previous game time to the start of the predetermined effect at the current game time does not exceed a reference period. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, which is configured to perform.

  When performing predetermined effects at the previous and next game times, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous is determined at the next game time after the predetermined effects are completed at the previous game time. It is easy to be influenced by the period until is started. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the effect shown in the feature A11 can be preferably exhibited by adopting a configuration in which the restriction is performed when the interval period does not exceed the reference period.

Feature A13. The acquisition information storage means can store a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
The grant determination means is configured to sequentially perform the grant determination for the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
The special restriction unit is configured to perform the restriction when the special information corresponding to the next game round is stored by the end of the previous game round. Game machines.

  When performing predetermined effects at the previous and next game times, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous is determined at the next game time after the predetermined effects are completed at the previous game time. It is easy to be influenced by the period until is started. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the special feature corresponding to the next game round is stored before the end of the previous game round, so that the above-described restriction is applied, so that the effect shown in the feature A11 is achieved. It becomes possible to exhibit suitably.

Feature A14. Related information storage means (continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140) for storing information on the execution status of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means,
The execution number determination means is configured to determine the number of executions of the predetermined effect in the current game time based on the specific result and the execution state of the predetermined effect in the game time before the current game time. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein

  If it is possible to associate with the predetermined effect executed in the previous game times when the predetermined effect is executed in the current game time, the occurrence pattern of the predetermined effect is compared with the case where the current game time is handled alone. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of setting the diversification and the predetermined performance. The use of the predetermined effect in the previous game round in this way is advantageous for improving the degree of attention to the game by the predetermined effect.

  In the combination with the features A6 to A10, the “predetermined effect” shown in this feature may be the “first predetermined effect”.

  Feature A15. The execution number determination means is configured such that an interval period from the end of the predetermined effect at the previous game time to the start of the predetermined effect at the current game time is a reference period (for example, the same time as the fixed display time: 2 sec), the number of executions of the predetermined effect in the current game round is determined based on the specific result and the execution state of the predetermined stage in the game round before the current game round. The gaming machine according to Feature A14, wherein:

  When performing predetermined effects at the previous and next game times, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous is determined at the next game time after the predetermined effects are completed at the previous game time. It is easy to be influenced by the period until is started. Therefore, as shown in the present feature, when the interval period does not exceed the reference period, the effect shown in the feature A14 can be preferably exhibited by adopting a configuration in which the game times are linked.

Feature A16. The acquisition information storage means can store a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
The grant determination means is configured to sequentially perform the grant determination for the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
The execution number determination means, when the special information corresponding to the next game time is stored before the previous game time is completed, the predetermined result and the predetermined game time before the current game time. The gaming machine according to Feature A14, wherein the number of executions of the predetermined effect in the current game time is determined based on the execution status of the effect.

  When performing predetermined effects at the previous and next game times, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous is determined at the next game time after the predetermined effects are completed at the previous game time. It is easy to be influenced by the period until is started. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when special information corresponding to the next game time is stored before the end of the previous game time, the game time can be linked to each other. It is possible to suitably exhibit the effects.

Feature A17. Information corresponding to the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the grant determination, and the timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination Including a prior identification means for identifying in
The execution number determination means determines the number of executions of the predetermined effect in the game times before the game times specified by the destination specification means based on the specification result by the destination specification means. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A16.

  When a predetermined effect is repeated by one game time alone, it is assumed that restrictions on the number of executions and the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect become strong. For example, if the number of executions of a predetermined effect is to be increased when the game times that have been targeted for the first time correspond to the grant correspondence result, there may be cases where a sufficient number of executions cannot be secured depending on the operation period of the game times. Can occur. In this regard, as shown in this feature, when the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined in the game times (the current game times) before the game times that are the previously specified objects, By adopting a configuration that takes into account the specific information related to the times, it is possible to realize the cooperation of the previous and next game times, and to prepare for the shortage of the operation period as described above, for example.

Feature A18. The destination specifying means specifies the operation period of the game times related to the predetermined special information, and the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed in the game times related to the predetermined special information based on the operation periods. Means for identifying
The effect executing means executes the predetermined effect at least at the end of the current game round when the number of times that the predetermined stage can be executed in the game round related to the predetermined special information is less than the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine according to Feature A17, characterized by comprising:

  As shown in feature A18, when the number of times that a predetermined effect can be executed in a later game round is less than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined effect is executed at least at the end of the current game round. It is possible to make the number of the predetermined effects executed in the subsequent game times to the subsequent game times close to the predetermined number of times.

Feature A19. The information acquisition means is for acquiring the special information based on the entrance to the entrance part,
As the gaming state, there are provided a first gaming state (low frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the pitching part than the first gaming state,
The operation period (variable display time) and the notification period (confirmed display time) of the game turn operation are configured so that the second game state is shorter than the first game state,
The effect executing means has variable display means (design display device 253) for variably displaying a picture on a display screen (display screen 253a), and variable display for variably displaying the picture on the display screen as the predetermined effect. Including a stop display for stopping and displaying the pattern through the variable display,
The variable display period of the picture in the predetermined effect coincides with the operation period in the second gaming state, and the stop display period of the picture in the predetermined effect coincides with the notification period in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game monotonization can be suppressed by changing the progress speed of the game between the first game state and the second game state. Further, in the first gaming state, it is possible to change the progress speed of the game in a pseudo manner while maintaining the gaming state, which can contribute to the suppression of the monotony of the game.

Feature A20. In the second gaming state, the variable display of the picture is started on the display screen in accordance with the start of the game turning operation, and after the variable display of the picture is maintained until the end of the game turning action, the giving The design corresponding to the result of the determination by the determination unit is stopped and displayed.
The effect execution means is means for stopping and displaying the pattern corresponding to the result of the determination of grant when the predetermined effect is executed corresponding to the end of the game times as means for stopping and displaying the pattern at the predetermined effect. And a means for stopping and displaying a picture that does not correspond to the result of the grant determination when the predetermined effect is executed in correspondence with a time other than the end of the game times. Gaming machine.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, a pattern display similar to the pattern display in the second gaming state can be reproduced in the first gaming state. That is, even if the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, the appearance can be shown as if it is the second gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to make an impression as if the progress speed of the game is changing in a pseudo manner without changing the game state, and it is possible to contribute to suppression of monotonization of the game.

  Feature A21. The gaming machine according to Feature A19 or Feature A20, wherein the predetermined effect is an effect similar to the game times effect executed at each game time in the second gaming state.

  As shown in this feature, if the game turn effect in the second game state is diverted to a predetermined effect, the effect of resembling the second game state can be more suitably exhibited.

<Feature B group>
The following feature B group is: “Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a picture display device that displays a picture on a display screen in a variable manner. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. In response to a winning at the operating opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, is generated, and a variation display of the pattern is started. Regarding the background technology that a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), “in recent years, the degree of attention to gaming has been increased. However, there is still room for improvement in the construction of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. ” It is those that have been.

Feature B1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162);
Transition determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (hit information) (processing such as lottery determination is executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) Function)
Based on the result of the transition correspondence that the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than usual. A gaming state transition means (a function of executing a gaming state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
Display means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping display with a pattern combination corresponding to the determination result after performing variable display of a plurality of images on the display screen;
If the result of determination by the determination means is the transition response result, a predetermined picture combination (symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result) corresponding to the transition response result before the transition to the special gaming state is A gaming machine that is stopped and displayed on the display screen,
As one of the variable display modes of the picture on the display screen, the picture that is stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined picture combination, and at least a part of the picture is variably displayed. A special variable display mode (for example, super reach D) for shifting to a certain reach state is provided,
As a display effect executed before entering the reach state in the game times corresponding to the special variable display mode, the effect execution period is configured to be shorter than the shortest period until the reach state is reached. Has a production (for example, a first special production)
The display control means includes
Based on the period until the reach to the reach state at the game times corresponding to the special variable display mode and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect, the number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed during the game times is specified. , Execution number determination means (function for determining an effect pattern by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for determining the execution number of the predetermined effect in the game time based on the specified result;
Before entering the reach state, there is an effect execution means (a function for executing the first special effect by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) based on the determination by the execution frequency determination means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature B1, the number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed before the transition to the reach state is specified based on the period until the reach state and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined number is determined based on the specification result. The number of performances is determined. Thereby, before shifting to a reach state, a predetermined effect will be repeated, for example in the possible range. A gaming machine is generally configured to shift to a reach state at various timings for reasons such as suppressing monotonization of the game. According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined after specifying the extent to which the predetermined effect can be executed based on the determined transition timing to the reach state. The predetermined effect can be repeatedly executed in accordance with the transition mode to the reach state. Thereby, the improvement effect of the attention degree to the game by a predetermined effect can be exhibited suitably.

  Feature B2. The game machine according to Feature B1, wherein the effect execution means is configured to suggest an expectation degree to shift to the reach state depending on the number of executions of the predetermined effect.

  The number of executions of the predetermined effect is related to the transition to the reach state. In such a configuration, the degree of attention of the player is likely to be suitable for a predetermined effect. Here, if the combination with the feature B1 can cope with the timing of transition to various reach states, the suggestion function by the predetermined effect can be suitably exhibited. This is preferable for improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B3. The display control means is configured to suggest the degree of expectation that is the transition correspondence result depending on the number of times of execution when the predetermined effect is continuously executed.
As the special variable display mode, a first special variable display mode and a second special variable display mode that is longer than the first special variable display mode to transition to the reach state are provided,
When the determination result by the determination unit is the transition response result, the second special variable display mode is more easily set than the first special variable display mode, and the determination result by the determination unit is the transition result. The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2, wherein when the result is not a response result, the first special variable display mode is more easily set than the second special variable display mode.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the case of a transition response result, the period until shifting to the reach state is likely to be longer than in the case of a transition response result, and the number of executions of a predetermined effect can be increased. Become. On the other hand, if it is not a transition response result, the period until shifting to the reach state is likely to be shortened, and the number of executions of the predetermined effect is reduced. According to this configuration, the possibility of being a transition response result is increased by increasing the number of executions of the predetermined effect, and the possibility of being a transition response result is decreased by decreasing the number of executions of the predetermined effect. A relationship is given to the result of the transition determination and the number of executions of the predetermined effect.

  Feature B4. The difference between the period until transition to the reach state in the first special variable display mode and the period until transition to the reach state in the second special variable display mode is the execution of the effect of the predetermined effect The gaming machine according to Feature B3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be an integral multiple of a period.

  By making the difference in the transition timing to the reach state an integral multiple (× 1, 2, 3,...) Of the production execution period of the predetermined production, the execution period of the predetermined production can be secured by the difference. It is possible to prevent the configuration from becoming complicated when realizing differentiation between the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode while facilitating the progress of the production.

Feature B5. The display control means includes a transition timing determination means for determining a transition timing to the reach state based on a determination result by the transition determination means,
The execution number determining means is configured to identify a period until the shift to the reach state based on the transition timing determined by the transition timing determining means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  It is preferable to set various timings for shifting to the reach state in order to suppress monotonization of the game effect and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, if the transition timing is varied, the number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed can be varied accordingly. Therefore, as shown in feature B4, in the configuration in which the transition timing to the reach state is determined based on the transition determination result, the period until transition to the reach state is identified based on the result, and the identification result is A practically preferable configuration can be realized by determining the number of executions of the predetermined effect based on the configuration.

Feature B6. The execution number determination means is a first execution number determination means,
The number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed during the game time is specified based on the period until the game time is ended in the game time not corresponding to the special variable display mode and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. And a second execution number determination means for determining the number of executions of the predetermined effect in the game time based on the specific result,
The feature execution means is configured to execute the predetermined effect based on the determination by the first execution number determination means and the determination by the second execution number determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B6, in the game times that do not shift to the reach state, the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined based on the execution period of the game times and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. By adopting a configuration in which a predetermined effect is executed even for game times that do not shift to the reach state, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game for the player who expects to shift to the reach state.

  When the technical idea shown in the feature A group is applied, the “second execution count determining means” shown in this feature can be changed to the “execution count determining means” shown in the feature A group. .

  It is possible to apply each technical idea shown in the feature A group to the feature B group described in detail above.

<Feature C group>
The following feature group C is “A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a picture display device that displays a picture on a display screen in a variable manner. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. In response to a winning at the operating opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a winning state is generated, and a display of variation in the design is started. Regarding the background technology that a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1), “in recent years, the degree of attention to games has increased. However, there is still room for improvement in the construction of the gaming machine to realize an increase in the degree of attention to the game. ” It is those that have been.

Feature C1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162);
Grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result (for example, jackpot result) corresponding to granting a privilege to the player A function of executing a lottery process or the like in the MPU 402 of the control device 162);
The game-turning operation is performed with one game round being the end of the game-turning action due to the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means from the start of the game-round action. And a game number control means (a function for executing the game number control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling predetermined notification means (the display part for the operating port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game time control means determines the operation period (variable display time) of the operation for game play for each game time (function to execute variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of the main controller 162). Have
When the game turn operation is being performed, effect execution means for executing the effect in parallel with the game turn operation (the variable display control process is executed by the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) Function)
The first predetermined effect (for example, the first special effect) and the second predetermined effect (for example, the second special effect or the second) configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period as the effect executed by the effect executing means. 3 special effects) are provided, and when the first predetermined effect is continuously executed without the second predetermined effect, the expectation degree corresponding to the assignment corresponding result is suggested by the number of consecutive times. It is the composition that
When the first predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game, the effect executing means interposes the second predetermined effect between the first predetermined effects, and the first predetermined effect. 2. A gaming machine comprising means for dividing a first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect and a first predetermined effect executed after the second predetermined effect.

  In the configuration in which the degree of expectation that is the result of granting is indicated by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects, there is a concern that the difference between the expected degree suggested by excessively continuous first predetermined effects and the actual game result will increase. The Here, it is possible to simply make a configuration in which the first predetermined effect is not performed, or to replace the beginning and end of the first predetermined effect group with the second predetermined effect. The production effect will not be demonstrated well. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the second predetermined effect is intervened and the first predetermined effect group is divided back and forth, the execution opportunity of the first predetermined effect is suppressed from being excessively reduced. It is possible to suppress the continuous number from becoming excessively large. Thereby, the said deviation can be suppressed, ensuring the production effect by the 1st predetermined production. Therefore, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exhibited by the first predetermined performance.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 performs a winning process for the operation port”). Function to be executed), acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means (reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main controller 162), and special information stored in the acquisition information storage means Grant determination means for determining whether or not the information corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player (a function of executing a process such as a lottery lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) ) And a game result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game turn operation is started, the game turn operation is terminated. As a game time control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a game time control process for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display unit for the operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game turn operation is performed. In the gaming machine having a function to perform the above, the game time control means is a period determining means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining the operation period of the operation for the game times for each game time. Effect execution means (a symbol display device 253 and a notification / effect control device) having a function for executing a setting process and executing an effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is being performed 140 MPU 442), and the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period as an effect executed by the effect executing means. The first predetermined effect (for example, the first special effect) and the second predetermined effect (for example, the second special effect or the third special effect) are provided, and the effect executing means is configured to perform the first operation during one game. When the predetermined effects are executed a plurality of times, the first predetermined effects are executed before the second predetermined effects by interposing the second predetermined effects between the first predetermined effects. It is also possible to use a gaming machine characterized by having means for dividing the first predetermined effect to be executed after the second predetermined effect. The technical ideas shown in the following features C2 to C11 can also be applied to this configuration.

  Feature C2. The effect executing means has means for setting an upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect based on a determination result by the grant determining means, and when the upper limit can be reached, the second predetermined effect is interposed. The first predetermined effect is divided into a first effect that is executed before the second predetermined effect and a first effect that is executed after the second predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to Feature C1.

  By setting an upper limit to the number of consecutive first predetermined effects according to the result of the determination of granting, and when the upper limit is exceeded, the second predetermined effect is interposed, so that the first predetermined effect is, for example, the first half and the second half It can divide | segment and it can suppress suitably that the said 1st predetermined production is repeated excessively in the form which is unsuitable for the result of provision determination.

  Feature C3. The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or Feature C2, wherein the second predetermined effect is set such that an execution period of the second predetermined effect is an integral multiple of an execution period of the first predetermined effect. .

  When simply trying to interrupt the second predetermined effect in the first predetermined effect group, an excess or deficiency may occur in the effect period due to the interruption of the second predetermined effect. This can be a factor that impairs the smoothness of the performance. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the execution period of the second predetermined effect is an integral multiple of the execution period of the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect is executed instead of the predetermined number of first predetermined effects. Therefore, the above excess and deficiency can be suppressed. Thereby, the smoothness of production progress can be secured.

  Feature C4. As a setting mode for setting an intervening location of the second predetermined effect when the first predetermined effect group is divided into front and rear by the second predetermined effect, a first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect is set. A first setting mode in which the number of times is greater than the number of first predetermined effects to be executed later, and a first predetermined effect in which the number of first predetermined effects to be executed before the second predetermined effect is executed later. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein a second setting mode that is less than the number of times is provided.

  When intervening the second predetermined effect, the number of times of the first predetermined effect executed after the second predetermined effect is increased because the intervention location is closer to the front. The number of second predetermined effects executed after the second predetermined effect is reduced. If it is set as the structure which provides such a difference, it can suppress suitably that an effect becomes monotonous in the structure which divides a 1st predetermined effect group back and forth by intervention of a 2nd predetermined effect.

  Feature C5. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, wherein when the determination result by the provision determination unit is the provision correspondence result, the configuration is more likely to be the second setting aspect than the first setting aspect.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the case of the grant correspondence result, for example, the first predetermined effect is easily continued in the second half of the game times. In this way, according to the configuration in which the intervention position of the second predetermined effect is determined so as to correspond to the game result, the first predetermined effect is divided into the first half / second half by the intervention of the second predetermined effect. It is possible to favorably secure the original function of strengthening the connection between the continuous of the predetermined effects → for example the reach display effect and suggesting the degree of expectation by repeating the first predetermined effect.

Feature C6. Information display means (for example, an effect displayed on the display screen 253a) for displaying the number-of-times corresponding information corresponding to the number of times that the first predetermined effect is continuous;
And a means for resetting the number-of-times correspondence information displayed on the information display means when the first predetermined effect is executed after the second predetermined effect is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C5.

  By displaying the number-of-times correspondence information when the first predetermined effect continues, it becomes easy to grasp the current number of times even if there is an oversight or the like. When the second predetermined effect intervenes in such a configuration, it is clearly indicated that the continuation of the first predetermined effect has been stopped by resetting the count correspondence information. Thereby, it becomes clear that the second predetermined effect is an opportunity to stop the continuation of the first predetermined effect, and it is possible to suppress the contents from becoming difficult to understand due to complication of the effect.

Feature C7. Display means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying a pattern combination corresponding to the result of the application determination after performing variable display of a plurality of images on the display screen. ,
A game machine in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen when the result of the judgment by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result,
The effect execution means performs a display effect using a picture displayed on the display screen,
The first predetermined effect has a configuration in which the design is variably displayed on the display screen, and the design is temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen so as to be a design combination that does not correspond to the assignment correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein:

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, by executing the first predetermined effect a plurality of times during one game, it is possible to make it appear as if the progress speed of the game has changed significantly. However, in such a configuration, the game may become monotonous by repeating the first predetermined effect in a short cycle. Therefore, the monotonousness of the game can be suppressed by intervening the second predetermined effect in the first predetermined effect group. In particular, in the configuration in which the first predetermined effect continues as shown in the feature C1 and the expectation level that is the result of granting is increased, the excessively continuous first predetermined effect is a factor that confuses the player. This is not preferable. In this respect, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by the configuration in which the continuation of the first predetermined effect is stopped by the intervention of the second predetermined effect.

Feature C8. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162);
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) A function to execute a lottery process etc.)
The game-turning operation is performed with one game round being the end of the game-turning action due to the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means from the start of the game-round action. And a game number control means (a function for executing the game number control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling predetermined notification means (the display part for the operating port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game time control means has period determination means (function to execute a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining an operation period of the game turn operation for each game time,
When the game turn operation is being performed, effect execution means for executing the effect in parallel with the game turn operation (the variable display control process is executed by the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) Function)
The first predetermined effect (for example, the first special effect) and the second predetermined effect (for example, the second special effect or the second) configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period as the effect executed by the effect executing means. 3 special effects) are provided, and when the first predetermined effect is continuously executed without the second predetermined effect, the degree of expectation that is the transition correspondence result is indicated by the number of consecutive times. It is composed,
The production execution means
When the first predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game, the first predetermined effect is placed before the second predetermined effect by interposing the second predetermined effect between the first predetermined effects. Means for dividing the first predetermined effect to be executed and the first predetermined effect to be executed after the second predetermined effect;
Means for continuing the first predetermined effects by arranging the second predetermined effects before or after the first predetermined effects when the first predetermined effects are executed a plurality of times during one game. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  As shown in feature C8, in the configuration indicating the expectation level that is the result of granting depending on the number of consecutive first predetermined effects, the expected level suggested by excessively continuous first predetermined effects and the actual game result There is concern that the gap will increase. Here, a configuration in which the first predetermined effect is not performed is possible, but with such a configuration, the effect of the first predetermined effect cannot be exhibited well. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the second predetermined effect is intervened to prevent the continuous number from becoming excessively large, the above-mentioned divergence is ensured while ensuring the effect of the first predetermined effect. Can be suppressed. Thereby, the effect which aims at the improvement of the attention degree to a game by a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect can be exhibited suitably.

Feature C9. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162);
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) A function to execute a lottery process etc.)
The game-turning operation is performed with one game round being the end of the game-turning action due to the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means from the start of the game-round action. And a game number control means (a function for executing the game number control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling predetermined notification means (the display part for the operating port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game time control means has period determination means (function to execute a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining an operation period of the game turn operation for each game time,
When the game turn operation is being performed, effect execution means for executing the effect in parallel with the game turn operation (the variable display control process is executed by the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) Function)
The first predetermined effect (for example, the first special effect) and the second predetermined effect (for example, the second special effect or the second) configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period as the effect executed by the effect executing means. 3 special effects) are provided, and when the first predetermined effect is continuously executed without the second predetermined effect, the degree of expectation that is the transition correspondence result is indicated by the number of consecutive times. It is composed,
When the second predetermined effect is executed at the game time after the first predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game time, the effect executing means performs the first predetermined effect between the first predetermined effects. 2. A gaming machine having means for executing a predetermined effect.

  As shown in feature C9, in the configuration indicating the expectation level that is the result of granting depending on the number of consecutive first predetermined effects, the expectation level suggested by excessively continuous first predetermined effects and the actual game result There is concern that the gap will increase. Here, a configuration in which the first predetermined effect is not performed is possible, but with such a configuration, the effect of the first predetermined effect cannot be exhibited well. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the second predetermined effect is intervened to prevent the continuous number from becoming excessively large, the above-mentioned divergence is ensured while ensuring the effect of the first predetermined effect. Can be suppressed. Thereby, the effect which aims at the improvement of the attention degree to a game by a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect can be exhibited suitably.

Feature C10. As the gaming state, a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the operation period of the game turning operation is shorter than the first gaming state are provided,
The first predetermined effect is an effect that is executed once in each game time in the second gaming state,
In the first game state, the operation period of each game time is configured to be able to execute the first predetermined effect a plurality of times,
The features C1 to C9 are characterized in that the performance executing means is configured to execute the first predetermined performance a plurality of times in each game time when the first game state is established. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature C10, in the first gaming state, it is possible to make it appear as if it is in the second gaming state by repeating the first predetermined effect during one game round. That is, it is possible to change the rhythm of the game progress greatly by making it seem as if the game progress has accelerated at a stretch. Thereby, the monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be more suitably exhibited.

  Feature C11. In the case where the first predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game, the effect executing means interposes the second predetermined effect between the first predetermined effects, and then performs the first predetermined effect. The first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect is divided into the first predetermined effect executed after the second predetermined effect, and the second predetermined effect is executed after the first predetermined effect. A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, characterized in that it has means.

  As shown in the feature C1 and the like, in the configuration in which the first predetermined effect is continuously executed, the first predetermined effect is continued so as to straddle the preceding and following game times, so that the number of consecutive first predetermined effects can be increased. May be excessive. For example, although it is possible to suppress the continuous number of first predetermined effects from becoming excessive by considering the execution status of the first predetermined effect in the previous game times when determining the outline of the effects at a later game time, There is a concern that the configuration in which the outline of the presentation is always determined in consideration of the previous game times will be a factor that increases the control load and the restrictions on the determination of the outline of the presentation. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the first predetermined effect is divided forward and backward by the second predetermined effect, it is possible to finish the effect of one game round with the second predetermined effect. Therefore, the influence on the later game times can be reduced, and the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above can be suitably suppressed.

  As shown in this feature, when the second predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game, for example, other than the last second predetermined effect (second second predetermined effect) The two predetermined effects (the first second predetermined effect) may not correspond to the assignment correspondence result.

  The technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature B group can be applied to the feature C group described in detail above.

<Feature D group>
The following feature group D is “A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a picture display device that displays a picture on a display screen in a variable manner. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. In response to a winning at the operating opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, is generated, and a variation display of the pattern is started. Regarding the background technology that a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), “in recent years, the degree of attention to gaming has been increased. However, there is still room for improvement in the construction of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. ” It is those that have been.

Feature D1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to transition information (a function of executing processing such as a lottery determination in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
The gaming state is shifted to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than usual based on the result of the transition correspondence that the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the transition information. A gaming state transition means (a function of executing a gaming state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main controller 162);
A display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) that displays a plurality of pictures on the display screen in a variable manner and then stops and displays the pictures in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. And
When the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result, a gaming machine in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the transition response result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special gaming state. There,
As a special variable display mode (for example, super reach D) which is one of the variable display modes of the pattern on the display screen,
Prior to the stop display of the picture combination corresponding to the determination result, the picture that is stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined picture combination, and at least a part of the pictures is variably displayed. A first special variable display mode (short) that shifts to a certain reach state;
A second special variable display mode (long) that is slower in timing than the first special variable display mode is provided for the transition to the reach state;
When the determination result by the determination unit is the transition response result, the first special variable display mode is more easily set than the second special variable display mode, and the determination result by the determination unit is the transition When the result is not a response result, the second special variable display mode is more easily set than the first special variable display mode.

  When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special variable display mode, the transition timing to the reach state changes according to the result of the transition determination. Thereby, monotonization of a game can be suppressed. In particular, in the case of a transition response result, it is possible to suitably earn an execution period such as an effect that expects the transition to the reach state by positively delaying the transition timing to the reach state. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree to a game about the period before a reach state shift.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 performs a winning process for the operation port”). Function to be executed), acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and special information stored in the acquisition information storage means correspond to the migration information. A determination means (a function for executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the determination is made, and a transition response result that the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the transition information Based on this, the game state transition means (MPU 402 of the main controller 162) for shifting the game state to a special game state (open / close execution mode) more advantageous to the player than usual. A game state transition process), a display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a), and after performing variable display of a plurality of designs on the display screen, Display control means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means, and the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result Is a gaming machine in which a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the transition correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special gaming state, and is one of the variable display modes of the picture on the display screen. As a special variable display mode (for example, Super Reach D), it is stopped and displayed on the display screen before stop display of the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result. A first special variable display mode (short) in which the printed pattern constitutes a part of the predetermined pattern combination and at least a part of the pattern is variably displayed, and the timing to shift to the reach state Is provided with a second special variable display mode (long) that is slower than the first special variable display mode, and when the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result, it is not the transition response result The first special variable display mode is easier to set than the second special display mode when the determination result by the determination unit is not the transition response result. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display mode is easily set. "

  In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is “information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function of executing a winning process for the operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). Whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means and the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the migration information. That the determination result (the function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and the determination result by the determination means correspond to the transfer information. Based on the game state transition means (MPU 402 of the main controller 162) for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than usual. A function for executing processing), a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a), and after performing variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display screen, these patterns are determined by the determination means. Display control means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping display in a combination corresponding to the determination result, and when the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result, A game machine in which a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the transition correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before transition to the special gaming state, and is a special variable that is one of the variable display modes of the picture on the display screen. As a display mode, the picture stopped on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined picture combination before the picture combination corresponding to the determination result is stopped. In addition, a first special variable display mode (short) in which at least a part of the pattern is variably displayed is shifted to a reach state, and a timing at which the state is shifted to the reach state is slower than the first special variable display mode. A special variable display mode (long) is provided, and the variable display unit sets the variable display mode of the pattern to the first special variable display mode when the determination result by the determination unit is the transition response result. And a means for setting the variable display mode of the pattern to the second special variable display mode when the determination result by the determination unit is not the transition response result. It is also possible to use “machine”.

Feature D2. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to transition information (a function of executing processing such as a lottery determination in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the transition correspondence that the judgment result by the judging means corresponds to the transition information A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main controller 162),
A display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) that displays a plurality of pictures on the display screen in a variable manner and then stops and displays the pictures in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. And
When the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result, a gaming machine in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the transition response result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special gaming state. There,
As a special variable display mode (for example, super reach D) of the pattern executed on the display screen,
Prior to the stop display of the picture combination corresponding to the determination result, the picture that is stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined picture combination, and at least a part of the pictures is variably displayed. A first special variable display mode (short) that shifts to a certain reach state;
A second special variable display mode (long) that is slower in timing than the first special variable display mode is provided for the transition to the reach state;
A first setting mode (normal effect mode) and a second setting mode (special effect mode) are provided as setting modes for the variable display mode in the normal gaming state,
In the first setting mode, when the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result, the first special variable display mode is more easily set than the second special variable display mode. ,
In the second setting mode, when the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result, the second special variable display mode is more easily set than the first special variable display mode. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special variable display mode, the timing for shifting to the reach state changes according to the shift response result and the setting mode. Thereby, monotonization of a game can be suppressed. In particular, in the first setting mode, in the case of a transition response result, it is possible to favorably earn an execution period of production or the like in the reach state by adopting a configuration in which the transition timing to the reach state is easily advanced. In the setting mode, when it is a transition response result, the transition timing to the reach state is likely to be delayed, so that it is possible to suitably earn an execution period such as an effect encouraging the transition to the reach state. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree to a game about both the period in reach state, and the period before reach state transition.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 performs a winning process for the operation port”). Function to be executed), acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and special information stored in the acquisition information storage means correspond to the migration information. It is assumed that a determination unit (a function for executing processing such as winning / failing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and a determination result by the determination unit correspond to the transition information. Based on the result of the transition correspondence, game state transition means (main control device 16) for shifting the game state to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. And a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and a variable display of a plurality of symbols on the display screen. Display control means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying these patterns in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means, and the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result. A game machine in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the transition correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special gaming state, and the pattern executed on the display screen As a special variable display mode (for example, Super Reach D), before the display combination is stopped on the display screen before the display of the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result is stopped. A first special variable display mode (short) in which a picture constitutes a part of the predetermined picture combination and at least a part of the picture is variably displayed, and a timing to shift to the reach state A second special variable display mode (long) that is slower than the first special variable display mode is provided, and a normal setting mode (normal effect mode) and a special setting are set as the setting modes of the variable display mode in the normal gaming state. Mode (special effect mode) is provided, and in the special setting mode, when the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result, the second special display mode is used rather than the first special variable display mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display mode is easily set. "

Feature D3. In the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode, a plurality of predetermined effects (for example, first special effects) configured such that an execution period becomes a predetermined period before reaching the reach state. It is configured to be able to be executed once, and when the predetermined effect is continuously executed, it is configured to suggest the degree of expectation that is the transition correspondence result depending on the number of times of execution.
The second special variable display mode is set such that a period from the start of the variable display to the transition to the reach state is longer than that of the first special variable display mode. The gaming machine according to D1 or feature D2.

  According to the feature D3, in the second special variable display mode, the period from the start of variable display to the transition to the reach state is longer than in the first special variable display mode. That is, in the case of a transition response result, the transition to the reach state is delayed, so that it is possible to increase the execution opportunity of the predetermined effect during the period.

  Feature D4. The first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode are configured such that the period until the combination of pictures corresponding to the determination result by the determination unit is stopped is the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

  If the time period is the same and the transition timing to the reach state is made different, the effects shown in the feature D1 and the like can be exhibited while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine.

Feature D5. In the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode, a predetermined effect configured such that the execution period is a predetermined period can be executed a plurality of times until the reach state is reached. Configured, when the predetermined effect is continuously executed, it is configured to suggest the degree of expectation that is the transition correspondence result by the number of times of execution,
The difference between the timing for shifting to the reach state in the first special variable display mode and the timing for shifting to the reach state in the second special variable display mode is set to be an integral multiple of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein

  As shown in the feature D5, if the transition timing difference is set to be an integral multiple of the predetermined period, the predetermined effect can be executed by the integral multiple. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excess or deficiency in the execution time of the effect due to a difference in the number of executions of the predetermined effect, that is, distortion in the effect flow in any special display mode. Thereby, the smoothness of production progress can be secured.

Feature D6. In the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode, a plurality of predetermined effects (for example, first special effects) configured such that an execution period becomes a predetermined period before reaching the reach state. It is configured to be able to be executed once, and when the predetermined effect is continuously executed, it is configured to suggest the degree of expectation that is the transition correspondence result depending on the number of times of execution.
An upper limit determination means for determining an upper limit of the number of continuous executions of the predetermined effect based on a determination result by the determination means;
The upper limit determining means is configured such that when the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result, the upper limit is likely to be higher than when the transition result is not the transition response result. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5.

  As shown in the feature D6, in the case where the expected degree of the transition correspondence result is suggested by the number of continuous executions of the predetermined performance, if the period until the shift to the reach state is shortened, the period substantially changes depending on the period. The number of consecutive times will be limited. In this case, there is a concern that even if it is originally desired to continue the predetermined effect up to the upper limit, the execution opportunity is impaired. Therefore, if the technical idea shown in the feature D1 or the like is applied to such a configuration, the substantial limitation as described above can be relaxed.

  In addition, it is also possible to apply each technical idea shown to the feature A group-the feature C group to the feature D group explained in full detail above.

<Feature E group>
The following feature group E is “A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a picture display device that displays a picture on a display screen in a variable manner. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. In response to a winning at the operating opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, is generated, and a variation display of the pattern is started. Regarding the background technology that a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), “in recent years, the degree of attention to gaming has been increased. However, there is still room for improvement in the construction of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. ” It is those that have been.

Feature E1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transfer information (presence / absence information). Function)
Based on the determination result by the determination means that the transition correspondence result (winning result) is assumed to correspond to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open / close execution) that is more advantageous to the player than usual. Game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Variable display means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) that displays a plurality of patterns on the display screen after being variably displayed in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. And
A gaming machine in which a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the transition response result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result Because
As a variable display mode of a picture executed on the display screen when the gaming state is a predetermined gaming state, the picture stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined picture combination And a special variable display mode (e.g., super reach D) for shifting to a reach state in which at least a part of the pattern is variably displayed is provided,
Related information storage means (continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification / production control device 140) for storing information related to the variable display mode of the previous game times;
When the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode, a transition timing determination unit (notification / effect control) that determines a transition timing to the reach state based on information stored in the related information storage unit And an MPU 442 of the device 140 for determining the timing for transition to reach display.

  According to the feature E1, in the game times corresponding to the special variable display mode, the transition timing to the reach state is determined according to the variable display mode in the previous game times. In this way, by diversifying the previous game times and the current game times, it is possible to realize diversification of presentation modes. This is preferable for improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. The special variable display mode is configured so that a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured so that an execution period becomes a predetermined period can be executed a plurality of times until the reach state is reached, When the predetermined performance is continuously executed, it is configured to suggest the degree of expectation that is the result of the transition according to the number of times of execution.
The transition timing determining means is a case where the variable display in the previous game round is ended in the predetermined effect and the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode in the current game round. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that the timing for shifting to the reach state is determined based on information stored in the related information storage means.

  Depending on the execution period of the game times, for example, it may be difficult to earn a continuous number of predetermined effects in the current game time alone. In a configuration in which the expected degree that is the transition correspondence result is suggested by the continuous number of the predetermined effects, such a restriction becomes strong, so that the relationship between the continuous number and the expected degree is easily broken. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the previous game round ends with a predetermined presentation, the predetermined presentation executed in the previous game round is diverted to the current game round. be able to. That is, by determining the timing for shifting to the reach state in accordance with the previous game times, it is possible to suitably suppress the excess or deficiency of the continuous number of times. Therefore, the function that suggests the degree of expectation can be performed well by a series of predetermined effects.

Feature E3. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transfer information (presence / absence information). Function)
Based on the determination result by the determination means that the transition correspondence result (winning result) is assumed to correspond to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open / close execution) that is more advantageous to the player than usual. Game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Variable display means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) that displays a plurality of patterns on the display screen after being variably displayed in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. And
A gaming machine in which a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the transition response result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result Because
As a variable display mode of a picture executed on the display screen when the gaming state is a predetermined gaming state, the picture stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined picture combination And a special variable display mode (e.g., super reach D) for shifting to a reach state in which at least a part of the pattern is variably displayed is provided,
In the special variable display mode, it is configured such that a predetermined effect configured to have an execution period of a predetermined period can be executed a plurality of times until the reach state is reached, and the predetermined effect is continuously performed. When executing, it has a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation that is the result of the transition according to the number of executions,
Related information storage means (continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140) for storing information related to the execution state of the predetermined effect in the previous game round;
When the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode, a transition timing determination unit (notification / effect control) that determines a transition timing to the reach state based on information stored in the related information storage unit And an MPU 442 of the device 140 for determining the timing for transition to reach display.

  Depending on the execution period of the game times, for example, it may be difficult to earn a continuous number of predetermined effects in the current game time alone. In a configuration in which the expected degree that is the transition correspondence result is suggested by the continuous number of the predetermined effects, such a restriction becomes strong, so that the relationship between the continuous number and the expected degree is easily broken. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, for example, in the previous game round, by determining the transition timing to the reach state in the current game round in consideration of the execution state of the predetermined effect in the previous game round. It is possible to divert the given presentation to the current game round. As a result, it is possible to appropriately suppress the excess and deficiency of the continuous number of times, and to successfully exhibit the function of suggesting the degree of expectation by the continuation of the predetermined performance.

Feature E4. Continuous number specifying means for specifying the number of times that the predetermined effect has been continuously executed until the start of the current game time when the previous game time has ended with the predetermined effect;
Setting means for setting the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect in the current game time based on the determination result by the determination means,
The transition timing determining means determines the transition timing in the current game time based on the number of times specified by the continuous number of times specifying means and the continuous number of times set by the setting means. Or the game machine as described in the characteristic E3.

  According to the configuration shown in the feature E4, when a predetermined effect continues until the start of the current game round, the timing for shifting to the reach state is determined based on the continuous count and the set number of times in the current game round. Is done. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably exhibit the function of suggesting the degree of expectation by continuing the predetermined effects.

  Note that “continuous” shown in this feature indicates a case where the predetermined effect is continuously executed without any other effect different from the predetermined effect.

  Feature E5. A regulation unit that regulates the determination of the transition timing by the transition timing determination unit when an interval period from the end of the previous game round to the start of the current game round exceeds a reference period (for example, 2 sec) The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein:

  Determining the transition timing that takes into account the previous game times under the circumstances where the interval period is excessively large is a factor causing discomfort in the above-mentioned cooperation. Can be. Therefore, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed by setting a reference period as a reference for determining whether or not cooperation is possible and refraining from excessive cooperation when the actual interval period exceeds the reference period.

  Feature E6. If the previous game round is a game round corresponding to the shift to the reach state, there is provided a regulating means for regulating the decision of the transition timing by the transition timing determining means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E5.

  When the game state is shifted to the reach state in the previous game round, the end of the game round is clearly shown because the result of the current shift determination is displayed with the end of the reach production. Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity due to unreasonable cooperation by adopting a configuration that does not cooperate with the previous game times.

Feature E7. In the special variable display mode, it is configured such that a predetermined effect configured to have an execution period of a predetermined period can be executed a plurality of times until the reach state is reached, and the predetermined effect is continuously performed. When executing, it has a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation that is the result of the transition according to the number of executions,
The transition timing determining means is configured to select any one of a plurality of transition timing candidates, and the transition timing is defined such that the timing difference is an integral multiple of the execution period of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6.

  When adjusting the number of executions of a predetermined effect, as described above, the difference in transition timing is set to an integral multiple of the execution period of the predetermined effect, so that there is an excess or deficiency in the effect period when adjusting the number of executions of the predetermined effect. Can be suitably suppressed.

  In addition, it is also possible to apply each technical idea shown to the feature A group-the feature D group to the feature E group explained in full detail above.

<Feature F group>
The following feature F group is: “Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a picture display device that displays a picture on a display screen in a variable manner. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. In response to a winning at the operating opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, is generated, and a variation display of the pattern is started. Regarding the background technology that a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), “in recent years, the degree of attention to gaming has been increased. However, there is still room for improvement in the construction of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. ” It is those that have been.

Feature F1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162);
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) A function to execute a lottery process etc.)
The game-turning operation is performed with one game round being the end of the game-turning action due to the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means from the start of the game-round action. In a gaming machine provided with a game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means,
The game time control means is a period determining means (main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the operation for game times and a maintenance period (fixed display time) for maintaining the notification result for each game time. The MPU 402 has a function of executing the variable display time setting process),
When the game turning operation is being performed, it includes an effect execution means (design display device 253) that produces an effect in parallel with the game turning operation.
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured so that an effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided. Having continuous execution means for continuously executing the production;
The gaming machine characterized in that the continuous execution means is configured to execute a predetermined effect executed at the end of a game time so as to extend over the operation period and the maintenance period in the game time.

  According to the configuration in which the predetermined effects are repeated in the game times, it is possible to give the player an impression that the game is progressing at a good tempo. This is preferable for improving the degree of attention to the game. Here, if the maintenance period of the notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is extremely short, it is assumed that the possibility of missing the notification result increases. On the other hand, if the maintenance period is simply lengthened, a predetermined effect that is repeated at a high tempo is stopped between game times, which may be an obstacle to exerting the above-described effect of improving attention.

  In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, since the predetermined effect executed at the end of the game time is executed so as to extend over the operation period and the maintenance period of the game time, the predetermined effect is generated at the next game time. The blank before restarting can be reduced. Thereby, even if the maintenance period of the notification result is set to be long to some extent, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by it.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the operation period is not divisible by an execution period of the predetermined effect.

  By having a non-integer multiple relationship between the execution period of the predetermined effect and the operation period of the game turn operation, a configuration in which the predetermined effect executed at the end of the game time spans the operation period and the maintenance period can be easily realized. be able to.

  Feature F3. The gaming machine according to Feature F2, wherein the maintenance period is longer than a remainder when the operation period is divided by an execution period of the predetermined effect.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, when game times are continuously executed, it is possible to avoid the predetermined effect executed at the end of the previous game time from reaching the next game time. It is preferable to avoid the interference with the next game time in order to secure the relationship between the operation for the game time and the performance in parallel therewith.

Feature F4. As a gaming state, a first gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a low frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (corresponding to a high frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game turning operation is shorter than the first gaming state. Normal gaming state), and
The predetermined effect is an effect that is executed once in one game time in the second gaming state,
In the first game state, the operation period of each game time is configured to be able to execute the predetermined effect multiple times,
Any of the features F1 to F3, wherein the effect executing means is configured to execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in each game time when the first game state is established. The gaming machine according to one.

  According to the feature F4, in the first gaming state, it is possible to make it appear as if it is in the second gaming state by repeating a predetermined effect during one gaming round. That is, it is possible to change the rhythm of the game progress greatly by making it seem as if the game progress has accelerated at a stretch. Thereby, the monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be more suitably exhibited. If the technical idea shown in the feature F1 or the like is applied to such a configuration, the difference between the first gaming state and the second gaming state can be suppressed from being noticeable.

Feature F5. A display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
After performing variable display of a plurality of pictures on the display screen, display control means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device) that finally stops and displays the pictures in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the application determination means 410),
When the predetermined effect is executed at the end of the game round, the picture is variably displayed on the display screen, and the picture is finally displayed on the display screen so as to be a picture combination corresponding to the assignment correspondence result. It is configured to stop display, and when it is not the case of being executed at the end of the game time, the design is variably displayed on the display screen, and the design is a pattern combination that does not correspond to the assignment correspondence result. In this way, it is configured to temporarily stop display on the display screen,
The temporary stop display period in which the temporary stop display is executed and the final stop display period in which the final stop display is executed are configured to be shorter than the sustain period. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  By repeating a predetermined effect (variable display of pattern → temporary stop display), it is possible to make it appear as if the game is progressing one after another. Since the blank between the predetermined effects generated at the end of the game times can be reduced, it is possible to make the breaks inconspicuous when the predetermined effects are resumed at the next game time.

Feature F6. As a gaming state, a first gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (corresponding to a high-frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game turning operation is shorter than the first gaming state. Normal gaming state), and
The predetermined effect is an effect that is executed once in one game time in the second gaming state,
In the first game state, the operation period of each game time is configured to be able to execute the predetermined effect multiple times,
The effect execution means is configured to execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in each game time when the first game state is established.
The second maintenance period, which is the maintenance period set in the second gaming state, is configured to be shorter than the first maintenance period, which is the maintenance period set in the first gaming state. ,
The gaming machine of feature F5, wherein a temporary stop display period during which the temporary stop display is executed in the predetermined effect is the same as the second maintenance period.

  By setting the temporary stop display period to the same length as the second sustain period as shown in this feature, the above-described mimicry effect can be further improved. However, in such a configuration, the difference between the temporary stop display period and the first sustain period is easily noticeable. Therefore, when the technical idea shown in the feature F1 or the like is applied to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the difference between the first game state and the second game state from being easily identified from the effect mode.

  In addition, it is also possible to apply each technical idea shown to the feature A group-the feature E group to the feature F group explained in full detail above.

<Feature G group>
The following feature group G is: “Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a picture display device that variably displays pictures on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a gaming area is provided. In response to a winning at the operating opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, is generated, and a variation display of the pattern is started. Regarding the background technology that a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), “in recent years, the degree of attention to gaming has been increased. However, there is still room for improvement in the construction of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. ” It is those that have been.

Feature G1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162);
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) A function to execute a lottery process etc.)
The game-turning operation is performed with one game round being the end of the game-turning action due to the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means from the start of the game-round action. And a game number control means (a function for executing the game number control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling predetermined notification means (the display part for the operating port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game time control means is a period determining means (main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the operation for game times and a maintenance period (fixed display time) for maintaining the notification result for each game time. The MPU 402 has a function of executing the variable display time setting process),
When the game turning operation is being performed, it includes an effect execution means (design display device 253) that produces an effect in parallel with the game turning operation,
The effect executing means performs display of a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display screen, and then determines the patterns by the application determination unit. Variable display means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) for final stop display in a combination corresponding to the result,
As a gaming state, a first gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (corresponding to a high-frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game turning operation is shorter than the first gaming state. Normal gaming state), and
As the production mode of the production execution means in the first gaming state, a normal production mode and a special production mode are provided,
In the normal effect mode, the display of the pattern on the display screen shifts to the first stop display before reaching the end timing of the game turning operation, and the first stop is performed at the same timing as the end timing of the game turning operation. It is configured to shift from display to the final stop display,
In the special effect mode, the first stop display is regulated, and the display of the pattern on the display screen is shifted to the final stop display at the same timing as the end timing of the game turning operation. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the first gaming state with a relatively slow progression speed, the transition from the normal performance mode to the special performance mode avoids the previous stop display that has been executed so far, and the previous stop. The final stop display is executed without going through the display. Thereby, it can be shown as if the period during which the notification result is maintained is shortened. In this way, if the configuration is such that the progress speed of the game is changed in a pseudo manner without shortening the maintenance period of the notification result by the predetermined notification means, the monotonization of the game is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved. Can contribute.

  It should be noted that “shift from the previous stop display to the final stop display” shown in this feature includes a configuration in which the picture combination displayed by the previous stop display is transferred to the final stop display.

  Feature G2. The maintenance period determined by the period determination means is configured to be the same in the normal performance mode and the special performance mode in the first gaming state. Gaming machine.

  In order to differentiate between the normal effect mode and the special effect mode using the temporary stop display → the final stop display executed in a series as shown in the feature G1, the maintenance period is set in both effect modes. Even if they are common, the difference in the traveling speed can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear as if there is a difference in the progress speed of the game while avoiding complication of the basic operation of the gaming machine related to the game time control means.

  Feature G3. The gaming machine according to Feature G1 or Feature G2, wherein the maintenance period determined by the period determination unit is configured to be the same in the first gaming state and the second gaming state .

  For example, when a difference is provided between the operation period and the maintenance period in each gaming state, the above-described difference in the traveling speed can be clarified and the sharpness can be emphasized by performing variable display → stop display of the pattern. However, in view of the fact that the maintenance period is a period for notifying the player of the determination result, it is not preferable to make the maintenance period extremely short in order to increase such a difference, and the maintenance period is An extremely long time is not preferable because it causes the player to feel as if the game is being delayed in vain. Therefore, it is substantially difficult to increase the difference. In this respect, if the maintenance period is set to be the same in any gaming state, and if a difference is generated by the first stop display shown in the feature G1, such a restriction can be preferably relaxed.

  Feature G4. The first stop display is configured so that there are more opportunities for the same symbol combination as the final stop display to be stopped and displayed than for the opportunity to stop and display a pattern combination different from the final stop display. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3.

  As shown in the feature G1, etc., the first stop display → the last stop display becomes a series, and in the configuration in which the stop display period is shown long, the first stop display is conspicuous to the last. The effect shown in G1 cannot be exhibited well. Therefore, as shown in this feature, it is possible to impress the player as if the first stop display is a part of the last stop display by mainly using the pattern that leads directly from the first stop display to the final stop display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience.

  Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein a period during which the first stop display is executed is the same as or shorter than a period during which the final stop display is executed. .

  When the first stop display is changed to the final stop display, the first stop display period becomes excessively long, so that a deviation from the operation of the predetermined notification means becomes conspicuous. There is concern that this may be a factor that gives the player the impression that the game is being delayed in vain. Therefore, when the first stop display is changed to the last stop display, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by limiting the first stop display period to be equal to or shorter than the last stop display period.

Feature G6. The maintenance period determined by the period determining means is configured to be the same in the normal effect mode and the special effect mode in the first gaming state,
A predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided as one of the effects performed in parallel with the game turning operation by the effect executing means. And
In the special effect mode, the effect executing means executes the predetermined effect a plurality of times during the period from the start of the game turning operation to the end of the game turning operation. A means for finally stopping and displaying the plurality of patterns together with the end of the revolving operation;
The predetermined effect includes a configuration for temporarily stopping display after variable display for the plurality of patterns displayed on the display screen,
The temporary stop display period when the temporary stop display is executed in the predetermined effect is configured to have the same length as the sustain period, and any one of features G1 to G5 The gaming machine described in 1.

  In the special effect mode, it is not preferable that a difference between the temporary stop display period and the final stop display period is generated in order to make the game progress faster by repeating the variable display of the pattern → the temporary stop display. This is because the conspicuous difference between the temporary stop display and the final stop display is an opportunity to determine the end timing of the game times. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the temporary stop display period and the final stop display period are configured to coincide with each other, even if the game turn moves to the next game turn while the predetermined effect is repeated, It becomes difficult to understand the difference between the display and the final stop display, and it becomes difficult to specify the boundary between game times. Therefore, the function of generating a change in the traveling speed in a pseudo manner can be suitably exhibited.

  Feature G7. The predetermined effect is the same effect as the effect executed in the game times in the second gaming state, and the execution period is the same length as the sum of the operation period and the maintenance period in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature G6, which is configured as described above.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, by shifting to the special effect mode during the first gaming state, it can be shown as if the transition has been made to the second gaming state. Here, according to the combination with the feature G6, both the temporary stop display and the final stop display in the special effect mode have the same appearance as the final stop display in the second gaming state. It can be demonstrated.

  The technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature F group can be applied to the feature G group described in detail above.

<Characteristic H group>
The following feature group H is: “There is a game machine such as a pachinko machine provided with a picture display device that displays a picture on a display screen in a variable manner. In this type of game machine, for example, it is provided in a game area. In response to a winning at the operating opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, is generated, and a variation display of the pattern is started. Regarding the background technology that a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1), “in recent years, the degree of attention to games has increased. However, there is still room for improvement in the construction of the gaming machine to realize an increase in the degree of attention to the game. ” It is those that have been.

Feature H1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162);
Grant determination means (main control) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result (a jackpot result) corresponding to granting a privilege to the player A function of executing a lottery process or the like in the MPU 402 of the device 162),
The game-turning operation is performed with one game round being the end of the game-turning action due to the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means from the start of the game-round action. And a game number control means (a function for executing the game number control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling predetermined notification means (the display part for the operating port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game time control means determines the operation period (variable display time) of the operation for game play for each game time (function to execute variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of the main controller 162). Have
Effect execution means (the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that executes a predetermined effect (for example, the first special effect) in parallel with the game rotation operation when the game rotation operation is being performed. The function to execute the variable display control process at
As the predetermined effect, there are provided a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect that are configured such that an effect execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the effect execution means performs the first predetermined effect during the operation period. It is configured to execute repeatedly,
The first predetermined effect is configured to suggest the expectation level that is the result of the grant according to the number of times the first predetermined effect is continuously executed without the second predetermined effect.
Information regarding the operation period when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination, the timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination A prior identification means to identify in
The execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game time is determined based on the operation period in the current game time determined by the period determining means and the information specified by the destination specifying means. And an execution mode determining means.

  In the configuration indicated by the feature H1, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects. Here, when it is going to make a 1st predetermined production | presentation continue by subsequent game times independently, the continuous frequency | count of a 1st predetermined production will be influenced by the operation | movement period of the said following game times. For this reason, an event may occur in which the actual number of consecutive times is less than the preferred number in spite of the situation where the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect should be set. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when determining the execution mode (number of times and arrangement) of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round, the operation period of the subsequent game round is taken into consideration. The Thereby, for example, when it is unlikely that the subsequent game times alone can sufficiently secure the continuous number of the first predetermined effects, the first predetermined effects can be started earlier in the current game time. The shortage in game times can be compensated. In addition, if the number of times of the first predetermined effect is likely to be excessive by taking over the number of times of the first predetermined effect in the current game time, by suppressing the continuation of the first predetermined effect in the current game time, Such inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature H2. The destination specifying unit is configured to provide information regarding the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is the target of the determination of the grant. It has a function to specify at the timing before
The execution mode determining means specifies the number of times that the first predetermined effect can be continuously executed from the information specified by the destination specifying means, and based on the specification result and the operation period in the current game round. The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein execution modes of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round are determined.

  As indicated by the feature H2, by specifying the grant determination result and the operation period information for the subsequent game times in advance, it is possible to grasp the number of consecutive first predetermined effects according to the subsequent game times. Based on this, the function shown in the feature H1 can be more suitably exhibited by determining the production mode in the current game round.

Feature H3. Display means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
After performing variable display of a plurality of designs on the display screen, display control means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the designs so as to be a pattern combination corresponding to the determination result. )
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, the gaming machine in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen,
As one of the variable display modes of the picture on the display screen, the picture that is stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined picture combination, and at least a part of the picture is variably displayed. A special variable display mode for shifting to a certain reach state is provided,
When the current game time corresponds to the special variable display mode, the execution mode determination unit is restricted from determining the execution mode based on the information specified by the destination specifying unit. The gaming machine according to Feature H1 or Feature H2.

  As shown in the feature H3, when the current game time corresponds to the shift to the reach state, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are set in accordance with the subsequent game times. Restrictions on performance in game times are increased. There is a concern that this will be a cause of the obsolete performance in this game. Therefore, in such a case, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by determining the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect without considering the subsequent game times.

Feature H4. Display means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
After performing variable display of a plurality of designs on the display screen, display control means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the designs so as to be a pattern combination corresponding to the determination result. )
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, the gaming machine in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen,
As one of the variable display modes of the picture on the display screen, the picture that is stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined picture combination, and at least a part of the picture is variably displayed. A special variable display mode for shifting to a certain reach state is provided,
The destination specifying means relates to a period of time before the transition to the reach state in the operation period in the game times when the game times that are the targets of the destination specification correspond to the special variable display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to identify information.

  When the subsequent game times correspond to the special variable display mode (reach), the period during which the predetermined effect can be executed is greatly limited. That is, the period during which the predetermined effect can be executed is limited to the period before the shift to the reach state. Therefore, as shown in the feature H1, in the case of performing the linkage with the current game round, it is preferable to link the game round by specifying information regarding a period until the game stage is shifted to the reach state in the subsequent game round. Can be.

  Feature H5. The execution mode determination unit is configured to determine the operation period in the current game round determined by the period determination unit and the information specified by the destination specification unit when a subsequent game round corresponds to the special variable display mode. The gaming machine according to Feature H4, wherein the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round is determined based on the above.

  As shown in the feature H4, when the subsequent game times correspond to the special variable display mode (reach), the operation period of the current game time and the time until the game state shifts to the reach state at the later game time. By determining the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round in consideration of the period, the technical idea shown in the feature H4 can be suitably realized.

  Feature H6. When the subsequent game times are taken into account when determining the execution mode in the current game round by the execution mode determination means, the first predetermined effect and the second in the current game round are determined by the execution mode determination means. The feature H4 or the feature H5 is characterized in that when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is determined, the execution modes of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the later game round are determined together. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In a case where cooperation between the current game round and the subsequent game round is to be achieved, it is preferable that the execution mode in the subsequent game round is determined together when the execution mode in the current game round is determined. . In this way, by restricting the modification of the execution mode in the subsequent game round, it is possible to avoid that the support function of the subsequent game round due to the current game round is not exhibited well.

  In addition, it is also possible to apply each technical idea shown to the feature A group-the feature G group to the feature H group explained in full detail above.

<Feature I group>
The following feature group I includes: “Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a picture display device that displays a picture on a display screen in a variable manner. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a gaming area is provided. In response to a winning at the operating opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, is generated, and a variation display of the pattern is started. Regarding the background technology that a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), “in recent years, the degree of attention to gaming has been increased. However, there is still room for improvement in the construction of the gaming machine to realize an increase in the degree of attention to the game. ” It is those that have been.

Feature I1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162);
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) A function to execute a lottery process etc.)
The game-turning operation is performed with one game round being the end of the game-turning action due to the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means from the start of the game-round action. In a gaming machine provided with a game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means,
The game time control means determines the operation period (variable display time) of the operation for game play for each game time (function to execute variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of the main controller 162). Have
When the game turning operation is being performed, it includes an effect execution means (design display device 253) that produces an effect in parallel with the game turning operation.
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect to a third special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided. The predetermined production can be executed multiple times during the operation,
Number information storage means (game number counter in the RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140) for storing information on the number of times corresponding to the number of times the predetermined effect is executed, which is information updated with the execution of the predetermined effect; ,
Means for executing a predetermined game process when the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means becomes information corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) (effect mode in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) A game machine characterized by having a function of switching between.

  For the predetermined effect shown in the feature I1, the effect execution period is set shorter than the operation period of the game turn operation, and is configured to be executed a plurality of times during the game turn. According to the configuration in which the predetermined effect is repeated at a pitch shorter than the game times, for example, the timing at which the predetermined game process is executed is faster than the case where the predetermined game process is executed in response to the progress of the game time. It can give the player an impression as if it is, and it can also contribute to the diversification of timing. Thereby, diversification of game effects and the like can be realized, and it can contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Feature I2. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162);
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) A function to execute a lottery process etc.)
The game-turning operation is performed with one game round being the end of the game-turning action due to the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means from the start of the game-round action. In a gaming machine provided with a game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means,
The game time control means is a period determining means (main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the operation for game times and a maintenance period (fixed display time) for maintaining the notification result for each game time. The MPU 402 has a function of executing the variable display time setting process),
When the game turning operation is being performed, it includes an effect execution means (design display device 253) that produces an effect in parallel with the game turning operation.
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect to a third special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided. The predetermined production can be executed multiple times during the operation,
Number-of-times information storage means for storing number-of-times information corresponding to the number of times the predetermined effect has been executed;
The number-of-times information stored in the number-of-times information storage means is information corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) greater than the maximum number of times (for example, 7 times) at which the predetermined effect can be executed in one game time. And a means for executing a predetermined game process based on the fact (a function of switching the effect mode by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140).

  For the predetermined effect shown in the feature I1, the effect execution period is set shorter than the operation period of the game turn operation, and is configured to be executed a plurality of times during the game turn. When the predetermined effect is repeated at a pitch shorter than the game times, the number-of-times information is updated, and when the predetermined effect is repeated over a plurality of game times, the predetermined number of times reaches the predetermined number of times. Processing will be executed. According to such a configuration, for example, the game is given an impression that the timing at which the predetermined game process is executed is faster than the case where the predetermined game process is executed with the progress of the game times. Can contribute to the diversification of timing.

  It should be noted that the predetermined game based on the fact that the number of times stored in the number-of-times information storage means reaches a predetermined number of times that is greater than the maximum number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed in one game time. The game machine is characterized by comprising a means for executing a process. ”A predetermined game process is executed based on the fact that the number of times stored in the number-of-times storage means has reached a predetermined number of times. And the predetermined number of times is configured to be greater than the maximum number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed in one game time. Is possible.

Feature I3. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162);
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) A function to execute a lottery process etc.)
The game-turning operation is performed with one game round being the end of the game-turning action due to the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means from the start of the game-round action. In a gaming machine provided with a game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means,
The game time control means is a period determining means (main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the operation for game times and a maintenance period (fixed display time) for maintaining the notification result for each game time. The MPU 402 has a function of executing the variable display time setting process),
When the game turning operation is being performed, it includes an effect execution means (design display device 253) that produces an effect in parallel with the game turning operation.
As a gaming state, a first gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (corresponding to a high-frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game turning operation is shorter than the first gaming state. Normal gaming state), and
The production execution means
A first execution means for executing a first effect configured such that an effect execution period is shorter than the operation period in the first gaming state at a game time in the first gaming state;
A second execution means for executing a second effect whose effect execution period is the same as the operation period in the second gaming state once in the game times in the second gaming state;
First storage means for storing information corresponding to the number of times the first effect has been executed;
Second storage means for storing information corresponding to the number of times the second effect has been executed;
And a process execution means for executing a predetermined game process when the information stored in the first storage means or the second storage means is information corresponding to predetermined reference information. A featured gaming machine.

  In the first gaming state in which the progress speed of the game is slower than in the second gaming state, the first effect is repeatedly executed during one game time, and the number of executions of the first effect reaches the reference number (reference information) A predetermined game process is executed. The progress speed of the pseudo game in the first game state can be made close to that in the second game state. In such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the game is progressing quickly even in the first gaming state, which is slow in progress, and to improve the degree of attention to the game in the first gaming state. Can contribute.

Feature I4. Effect data storage means for storing effect data of effects executed by the effect execution means;
The game machine according to the characteristic I3, wherein the first effect and the second effect are effects that are executed using predetermined effect data stored in the effect data storage means.

  An effect similar to the second effect executed in the second game state where the game progress speed is fast will be reproduced in the first game state, as if it has transitioned from the first game state to the second game state. Can look like Thereby, it can contribute to suppression of monotonization of a game.

  The configuration shown in this feature may be “a gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the first effect is the same effect as the second effect.”

Feature I5. As an effect setting mode of the effect executing means in the first gaming state, a first effect setting mode and a second effect setting mode are provided,
The first execution means is configured to execute the first effect a plurality of times in the game times in the second effect setting mode when the second effect setting mode is set in the first game state. The gaming machine according to Feature I3 or Feature I4, wherein:

  According to the feature I5, the first effect setting mode / the second effect setting mode are switched during the first game state, and the game is performed in the same manner as the second game state by shifting to the second effect mode. It can appear as if progress is accelerating.

  Feature I6. The process execution means changes the effect setting mode from the second effect setting mode to the first effect setting when the information stored in the first storage means becomes information corresponding to the predetermined reference information. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I5, wherein the gaming machine is configured to shift to a mode.

  According to the feature I6, when the first effect executed in the second effect setting mode reaches the reference count, the effect setting mode is switched to the first effect setting mode. By adopting such a configuration, the sharpness of the game progress can be enhanced.

  Feature I7. The process execution means is configured to set the effect setting mode as the first effect setting mode when the information stored in the second storage means becomes information corresponding to the predetermined reference information. The gaming machine according to Feature I6, wherein:

  According to the feature I7, the behavior in the second effect setting mode of the first gaming state can be brought close to the behavior of the second gaming state, as if the transition to the second gaming state was made during the first gaming state. You can enhance the effect of showing fake others.

Feature I8. Comprising reference information setting means for setting the predetermined reference information;
The reference information setting means includes means for setting the same information as the predetermined reference information set in the second gaming state in the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I7.

  According to the feature I8, the behavior between the case where the second game state is changed to the first effect mode and the case where the first game state (second effect mode) is changed to the first effect mode can be made closer to each other. This is preferable in enhancing the mimic effect that makes it appear as if the game state has shifted to the second game state during the first game state.

  It is also possible to apply each technical idea shown in the feature group A to the feature group H to the feature group I described in detail.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by a player, game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the fired A ball path (guidance path 103) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area and game parts (game nails 38, etc.) arranged in the game area (game area PE) A gaming machine that gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a passing part (such as a general winning opening 81).

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and finally stopping and displaying the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device for performing a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 80 ... Game board unit, 80a ... Game area formation body, 82 ... Variable winning device, 83a ... Upper operation port, 83b ... Lower operation port, 87 ... Main display unit, 91 ... Electric role 140, notification / production control device, 162 ... main control device, 253 ... symbol display device, 253a ... display screen, 402 ... MPU, 403 ... ROM, 404 ... RAM, 410 ... display control device, 442 ... MPU, 443 ... ROM, 444 ... RAM, ME ... variable display area, PE ... game area, SE ... reduced display area.

Claims (4)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player;
The game-turning operation is performed with one game round being the end of the game-turning action due to the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means from the start of the game-round action. In a gaming machine provided with a game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means,
The game time control means includes period determining means for determining an operation period of the game turn operation and a maintenance period in which the notification result is maintained for each game time,
When the game turning operation is performed, it includes an effect execution means for performing an effect in parallel with the game turning operation,
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect is provided such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the effect executing means continuously executes the predetermined effect during one game. Having continuous execution means,
The gaming machine characterized in that the continuous execution means is configured to execute a predetermined effect executed at the end of a game time so as to extend over the operation period and the maintenance period in the game time.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the operation period is not divisible by an execution period of the predetermined effect.   The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the maintenance period is longer than a remainder when the operation period is divided by an execution period of the predetermined effect. As the gaming state, a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the operation period of the game turning operation is shorter than the first gaming state are provided,
The predetermined effect is an effect that is executed once in one game time in the second gaming state,
In the first game state, the operation period of each game time is configured to be able to execute the predetermined effect multiple times,
The said execution execution means is comprised so that the said predetermined presentation may be performed in multiple times in each game time, when it is in the said 1st game state, The Claim 1 thru | or 3 characterized by the above-mentioned. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

Images